Skip to main content

Full text of "Life And Teaching Of The Masters Of The Far East Volume II"

See other formats


290    S73a2  v.2 

Spalding      -112 0 50  (set) 
Life  and  teaching  of  th< 
the  Far  East, 


59-071*7 

masters  of 


Kansas  cit^^^g  public  library 

— ""*        !    Kansas  city,  missouri 

i  Books  will  be  issued  only 

on  presentation  of  library  card. 

Please  report  lost  cards  and 

change  of  residence  promptly. 
Card  holders  are  responsible  for 

all  books,  records,  films,  pictures 
;  -or  other  library  materials 

checked  out  on  their  cards. 


31 148  00290  7905 


&.!).  88 


IUN26197$.;  .( 


WAI.  OCT  n  1976 


FEB  171977 


NOV 


LIFE  AND  TEACHING  OF  THE 
MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

VOLUME  n 

By  BAIRD  T.  SPALDING 


BfiVORSS  &  Co.,  Publishers 
52O  WEST  NINTH  STREET 
Los  ANGELES  is,  CALIFORNIA 


Copyright,  1927,  1937,  i§44 

By 
BAIRD  T.  SPALBING 

All  Rights  Resenred 

* 

Paper  Binding — 
Cloth   Binding- — 


Printed  in  the  United  States  of  America  by  DeVorss  Sc  Co., 
520  West  Ninth  Street,  Los  Angeles  15,  California 


IN  publishing  this,  the  Second  Volume  of  Life  and 
Teaching  of  the  Masters  of  the  Far  East9 1  am 
purposely  omitting  names  of  people  and  places. 
1  feel  that  I  am  at  liberty  to  withhold  names  of 
places  and  locations,  according  the  reader  the  privi- 
lege of  accepting  as  fact  or  fiction  as  he  deems 
expedient  the  accounts  set  forth  herein,  remarking 
only 'that  facts  are  at  times  more  astonishing  than 
fiction. 

At  the  time  of  taking  up  this  work  It  was  defi- 
nitely understood  that  nothing  should  be  published 
officially  until  the  work  had  progressed  to  the  degree 
where  deductions  could  be  reached  regarding  the 
life  and  teaching  of  these  people. 

With  the  above  statements  fixed  firmly  in  mind, 
I  am  presenting  for  the  reader's  consideration  the 
Life  and  Teaching  of  the  Masters  of  the  Far  East, 
Vol.  II. 

In  this  I  sincerely  and  with  all  respect  remind 
the  reader  that  the  more  receptive  one  is  the  more 
one  receives. 

(Signed)  BAIED  T.  SPALDING 


I 

THE  morning  of  January  ist  found  us  up  early 
with  faculties  alert.  Everyone  seemed  to  feel 
that  there  was  something  ahead  that  would 
our  past  experiences  but  stepping-stones  for 
those  to  come. 

^  As  we  gathered  around  the  breakfast  table  the 
friend  joined  us  whom  we  had  met  on  the  roof  of 
Emil's  home,  in  the  village  where  we  had  stop- 
ped while  on  our  way  here.  You  will  recall  him  as 
the  one  who  interpreted  my  dream.  After  exchanging 
greetings,  he  said,  aYou  have  been  with  us  for  more 
than  a  year.  You  have  traveled  with  us  and  lived 
among  us  and  shared  our  lives,  and  you  no  doubt 
have  confidence  in  us.  As  you  will  be  with  us  until 
April  or  May,  I  have  come  to  invite  you  to  go  to  the 
temple  of  the  Great  Tau  Cross,  which  you  have 
observed  is  cut  in  the  rock  of  the.  cliff  just  outside 
the  village/5 

We  found  afterwards  that  the  rooms  of  this 
temple  were  cut  from  the  rock  that  formed  a  per- 
pendicular cliff  over  six  hundred  feet  high.  The  open- 
ings that  formed  the  rooms  were  cut  deep  enough 
into  the  walls,  so  that  all  walls  were  of  rock.  Wher- 
ever it  was  necessary  to  place  windows  to  admit 
light  and  air,  openings  had  been  cut  through  the 
outer  wall  of  the  cliff,  which  faced  south.  The  open- 
ings for  the  windows  were  about  eight  feet  square, 
and  each  room  had  two  openings,  except  the  first  or 
lower  room.  This  room  had  only  one  opening,  which 
communicated  with  a  large  crevasse  that  was  worn 
in  the  rock  wall  just  east  of  the  temple.  When  the 
rooms  of  the  temple  were  cut  from  the  rock,  this 
room  had  no  opening  other  than  the  entrance  which 


THE  LIFE  OF  THE   MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

was  from  a  tunnel  cut  from  the  solid  rock  and  ter- 
minating in  the  crevasse  mentioned.  The  opening 
for  the  window  was  put  in  later.  Originally  the 
entrance  to  the  tunnel  was  hidden  under  a  great 
boulder  which  was  one  of  a  mass  that  had  fallen 
from  the  sides  of  the  cliff  and  lodged  on  a  projecting 
shelf;  and  this  boulder  had  been  so  arranged  that 
it  could  be  dropped  into  place  from  the  passageway. 
When  in  place,  it  could  not  be  moved  from  the  out- 
side. The  only  way  of  reaching  this  shelf  was  by  a 
ladder  about  fifty  feet  long  that  could  be  raised  or 
lowered  from  above.  The  openings  that  served  as 
windows  were  fitted  with  great  flat  stones  that  fitted 
into  grooves  at  the  bottom,  so  that  they  could  be  slid 
into  place.  When  they  were  in  place  there  was,  to 
one  standing  in  the  village,  no  appearance  of  an 
opening.  We  were  told  that  this  construction  was 
resorted  to  for  protection  from  the  marauding  bands 
that  infested  the  country  farther  north.  These  bands 
at  times  came  as  far  south  as  this  village.  The  village 
had  been  destroyed  a  number  of  times  but  the  people 
had  not  been  harmed,  as  they  could  take  refuge  in 
the  temple.  This  temple  had  not  been  built  by  our 
friends  but  had  been  acquired  by  them  from  the  vil- 
lagers, to  be  used  as  a  place  to  keep  numerous  rec- 
ords which  they  prized  very  highly.  After  their 
acquisition  of  the  temple  the  raids  ceased,  the  village 
had  not  been  molested,  and  they  all  lived  in  peace. 

It  is  claimed  that  some  of  these  records  date  back 
to  the  period  of  man's  advent  upon  this  earth ;  that 
these  records  are  those  of  the  Naacals,  or  Holy 
Brothers,  as  they  were  called,  and  that  they  came 
direct  from  the  Motherland  of  Man.  It  is  also 
claimed  that  these  Holy  Brothers  came  direct  to 
Burmah  and  taught  the  Nagas.  These  records  seem 


TEACHING  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

to  prove  that  the  forefathers  of  these  people  were 
the  authors  of  the  Sourya  Siddhanta  and  the  Earlier 
Vedas.  The  Sourya  Siddhanta  is  the  oldest  known 
work  on  astronomy.  These  records  place  it  back 
25,000  years;  the  Earlier  Vedas  they  place  back 
45,000  years.  It  is  not  claimed  that  these  are  all 
originals,  as  some  were  copied  from  the  originals  and 
were  brought  here  to  be  preserved.  It  is  claimed  that 
these  were  copied  from  the  same  records  that  the 
Babylonian  records  were  taken  from.  It  is  also 
claimed  that  the  originals  from  which  these  were 
copied  are  the  original  Osirian  and  Atlantean 
records. 

The  rooms  of  this  temple  were  arranged  one 
above  the  other  for  seven  stories  and  communication 
between  the  rooms  was  by  means  of  a  series  of  stone 
steps  cut  in  the  solid  rock.  The  opening  to  gain  access 
to  the  stairway  was  at  one  comer  of  the  room  and 
communicated  directly  with  the  stairway,  which  rose 
at  an  angle  of  forty-five  degrees  until  it  reached  a 
landing  about  eight  feet  square  where  the  entrance 
to  the  room  above  was  cut*  There  was  about  eight 
feet  of  solid  rock  left  between  the  ceiling  of  the  room 
below  and  the  floor  of  the  room  above.  The  ceiling 
of  the  upper  room  of  the  seventh  story  terminated 
about  twelve  feet  below  a  wide  jutting  ledge  of  rocks 
about  one  hundred  feet  from  the  top  of  the  precipice. 
A  stairway  led  from  this  room  up  through  an  open- 
ing that  communicated  with  the  center  room  of  five 
rooms  cut  from  the  wall  of  the  ledge  and  arranged 
two  on  each  side  of  the  center  room,  so  that  a  dia- 
gram of  the  whole  structure  would  represent  a  huge 
Tau  Cross. 

The  rooms  above  were  cut  so  that  the  ledge 
formed  a  porch  or  balcony,  and  the  entrances  were 


THE  LIFE  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

from  the  ledge.  The  cliff  was  a  soft,  coarse-grained 
granite.  The  work  evidently  had  been  done  with 
crude  hand  implements,  and  it  must  have  taken  years 
to  accomplish.  It  is  claimed  that  not  a  piece  of  timber 
was  used  when  the  temple  was  constructed.  After  it 
was  acquired  by  our  friends,  they  put  in  timber  and 
the  rooms  were  all  very  comfortable,  especially  on 
sunshiny  days. 

We  learned  that  since  they  had  acquired  the 
temple  the  windows  had  never  been  closed  nor  the 
entrance  barred,  yet  very  few  had  ever  visited  there 
unless  they  had  seen  and  knew  something  of  the  true 
spiritual  enlightenment. 

Our  friend  continued,  "This  day  is  to  you  the 
beginning  of  a  new  year,  the  old  having  passed  out 
as  it  were,  from  your  life,  never  to  return;  except 
possibly  in  thought,  as  the  memory  of  its  pleasures, 
its  sorrows  and  cares,  and  the  more  engrossing 
thoughts  of  business  come  flooding  back.  Aside  from 
that,  it  is  forgotten,  gone ;  to  you  a  page  torn  from 
the  year-book  of  your  life.  We  look  upon  it  as  a  per- 
iod of  attainment  and  added  triumph,  an  ongoing, 
a  span  carrying  us  on  to  a  more  glorious  development 
and  achievement;  a  time  of  greater  promise  and 
enlightenment ;  a  time  when  we  can  be  of  greater 
service ;  when  we  can  be  younger,  stronger,  and  more 
loving  from  each  succeeding  experience.  Your 
thought  is,  'Why?1  Our  answer  is,  to  draw  your  own 
conclusion,  choose  your  own  life/* 

Our  Chief  said,  without  any  thought  of  intruding, 
"We  wish  to  see  and  know.55 

Our  friend  resumed,  "From  this  time  on,  there 
are  definite  lessons  for  those  who  do  not  see  and 
know,  or  grasp  the  full  meaning  of  the  goal  of  a  life 
well  lived.  This  does  not  mean  a  life  of  asceticism 


TEACHING  OF  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

and  austerity  and  aloofness  or  sadness^This  means 
a  life  "oTaccomplishnfelit  in  joy  and  gladness,  where 
all  sorrows,  all  pain,  are  banished  forever/5 

Then  in  a  lighter  and  more  whimsical  mood  he 
said,  "You  have  expressed  a  desire  to  see  and  know. 
The  desire  is  no  sooner  expressed  than  it  is  fulfilled. 
The  thought  expressed  in  a  verse  in  your  Bible  comes 
to  me  as  I  look  over  this  assembly.QWhere  two  or 
three  are  gathered  together  in  My  Name,  there  will  I 
be  also."5  How  often  that  verse  has  been  looked  upon 
as  a  mere  play  upon  words,  instead  of  being  applied 
and  made  really  true.  The  great  error  you  have  made 
with  Jesus1  teachings  is,  you  have  consigned  them  to 
the  dim  and  misty  past,  looking  upon  them  as  myth- 
ical and  mystical,  pointing  to  something  that  may  be 
gained  after  death,  instead  of  knowing  that  they  can 
be  applied  in  the  da^  lives  of  all,  right  here  and 
now,  if  you  only  wiEj 

"We  wish  it  to  be  understood  that  we  are  not 
putting  forth  the  claim  that  Jesus,  as  the  Christ, 
represented  a  plane  or  condition  of  life  in  his  own 
realization  that  had  not  been  brought  forth  to  a 
greater  or  lesser  degree  by  a  great  many  seers  and 
prophets  of  other  times  and  peoples.  We  wish  to 
emphasize  his  life  because  that  life  is  the  one  you  can 
understand  more  fully.  The  specific  reference  to  his 
own  life  can  have  but  one  purpose  and  meaning,  and 
that  was  the  faith-inspiring  fact  that  his  'life  and 
experience  was  the  living  demonstration  of  Ms  teach- 
ings, (pie  speculative  dogma  of  vicarious  atonement, 
which  has  biased  Christian  thought  for  centuries,  can 
not  be  charged  to  the  author  of  the  Sermon  on  the 
Mount,  or  the  Parable  of  the  Prodigal  Son. 

"The  leaders  of  Christian  thought  have  diverted 
the  followers  of  Jesus  and  Ms  teachings  from  their 


THE  LIFE  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

practical  application  and  the  study  of  the  God  power. 
They  have  taught  them  to  look  upon  his  teachings  as 
the  experiences  of  the  Apostles  after  his  time,  instead 
of  teaching  them  that  the  law  upon  which  those 
teachings  were  based  was  an  exact  science  which 
could  be  understood  and  experienced  in  the  lives 
of  all 

"The  Orientals  have  made  the  scientific  phase  of 
their  religion  the  supreme  object  of  their  study  and 
attainment.  In  this  they  have  gone  to  the  Bother 
extreme.  In  this  way  both  have  consigned  their  reli- 
gion to  the  realm  of  the  miraculous  and  supernatural. 
The  one  has  become  absorbed  in  the  wholly  ethical, 
while  the  other  has  become  absorbed  in  the  scientific 
side  only.  Thus  both  have'  shut  out  true  spirituality. 

"The  monastic  life  of  retirement,  asceticism^  and 
seclusion  from  the  world,  whether  in  Buddhistic  or 
Christian  monasteries,  is  neither  a  necessity  nor  is  it 
the  true  method  of  attaining  spiritual  enlightenment 
nor  the  realization  of  the  perfect  life  of  wisdom  and 
power  as  brought  forth  by  Jesus. 

"These  monastic  systems  have  been  in  existence 
for  many  thousands  of  years,  yet  they  have  in  no 
wise  accomplished  as  much  for  the  uplift  of  the  com- 
mon people  as  did  the  teachings  of  Jesus  in  the  few 
short  years  of  his  time  here  on  earth. 

Qt  is  very  well  known  that  he  embraced  all  their 
teachings,  going  through  the  initiations  and  studying 
the  so-called  sacred  mysteries,  the  ritualistic  forms 
and  ceremonies,  until  he  came  to  the  teachings  of 
Osiris.  These  were  interpreted  to  him  by  a  priest 
who  had  held  himself  aloof  from  all  the  ritualistic, 
monastic,  and  materialistic  forms  of  worship. 

"This  priest  was  a  follower  of  King  Thoth,  of  the 
First  Dynasty  of  the  Egyptian  Kings.  When  King 


TEACHING  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

Thoth  declared  Egypt  an  empire,  he  did  it  under 
the  power  of  a  dictator  and  usurper  of  the  people's 
rights.  Centuries  before  these  people  had  built  up 
and  maintained  a  glorious  civilization  of  unity  and 
brotherhood  under  the  guidance  and  direction  of 
Osiris  and  his  followers.  These  people  were  the  pure 
white  race  and  were  always  known  as  the  Israelites, 
of  whom  the  Hebrew  race  is  a  division.  Thoth  ruled 
wisely  and  attempted  to  maintain  the  Osirian  teach* 
ings,  but  after  his  day  the  dark  and  material  concept 
crept  in,  as  the  Egyptian  or  dark  hordes  from  the 
south,  who  had  swept  him  into  power,  gained  sway. 
The  succeeding  dynasties  fell  away  from  Osirian 
teachings,  gradually  took  up  the  dark  concept  of  the 
dark  race,  and  finally  practiced  black  magic  entirely. 
Their  kingdom  soon  fell,  as  all  such  kingdoms  must 
fall 

"After  Jesus  had  listened  attentively  to  this  priest 
and  his  teachings,  he  recognized  their  deep,  inner 
meaning.  He  also  saw,  through  the  insight  which  he 
had  received  from  Buddhistic  teachings,  that  there 
was  a  great  similarity  underlying  the  two.  He  then 
determined  to  go  to  India,  over  the  old  caravan  route 
maintained  at  that  time. 

"There  he  studied  the  Buddhistic  teachings  which 
had  been  preserved  with  a  reasonable  degree,  of 
purity.  He  saw  that  in  spite  of  the  ritualistic  forms 
and  dogmas  that  had  been  imposed  by  man,  religion 
had  but  one  source,  and  that  was  the  God  within, 
Whom  he  designated  as  his  Father  and  the  Father 
of  all.  Then  he  threw  all  forms  to  the  winds,  as  it 
were,  and  went  directly  to  God,  went  straight  to  the 
heart  of  this  loving  Father.  When  he  had  done  this, 
see  the  wonderful  attainment.  He  soon  found  that 
this  did  not  take  long  years  of  weary  plodding 


THE  UFE  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

through  dogmas,  rituals,  creeds,  formulas,  and  Initia- 
tions which  the  priesthood  were  foisting  upon  the 
people  in  order  to  hold  them  in  ignorance  and  there- 
fore in  subjection.  He  realized  that  that  for  which 
he  was  seeking  was  right  within  himself.  He  knew 
that  in  order  to  be  the  Christ  he  must  declare  that 
he  was  the  Christ;  then  with  pure  motive  of  life, 
thought,  word,  and  deed  he  must  live  the  life  he 
sought,  in  order  to  incorporate  it  within  his  own 
physical  body.  Then,  after  perceiving  this,  he  had 
the  courage  to  go  out  and  declare  it  to  aH  the  world. 

"It  did  not  matter  from  whom  or  where  he  got 
his  realization.  It ^ was  the  work  that  counted;  not 
what  someone  else  had  done,  but  what  he  did  that 
counted.  The  common  people,  whose  cause  he  spon- 
sored, heard  him  gladly.  He  did  not  borrow  his  pre- 
cepts from  India,  Persia,  or  Egypt  Their  teachings 
were  but  the  outer  that  brought  him  to  see  his  own 
Godhead  and  the  Christ,  the  representation  of  it, 
that  was  in  every  one ;  not  in  a  few,  but  in  all. 

"Osiris  was  born  in  Atlantis  more  than  thirty-five 
thousand  years  ago.  The  chroniclers  of  his  life,  long 
after  his  time,  called  him  a  god  because  of  his  won- 
derful works.  He  was  a  direct  descendant  of  those  of 
higher  thought  who  had  kept  their  concepts  clear  in 
the  Motherland  of  Man. 

"It  was  so  of  the  greater  portion  of  all  the  myth- 
ological characters  that  have  been  brought  down  to 
us.  Their  works  and  characters  have  been  distorted 
by  repetition  and  translation  of  the  stories  concern- 
ing them.  Their  works  and  attainments  were  looked 
upon  as  supernatural  by  those  who  would  not  give 
the  time  and  thought  to  go  into  the  deeper  meaning 
and  find  that  they  were  divinely  natural  to  man  in 
his  true  dominion. 


JO 


TEACHING  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

"The  chroniclers  deified  Osiris ;  then  they  began 
making  images  of  him.  These  images  only  repre- 
sented what  he  stood  for,  at  first;  then  gradually 
the  images  became  fixed  in  the  mind,  the  ideal  was 
forgotten,  and  the  empty  idol  remained 

"Buddha  was  another  who  was  deified  by  the 
chroniclers  long  after  his  time.  Note  the  images  of 
him  that  have  been  set  up5  with  the  result  that  the 
image  is  worshipped  instead  of  the  ideal  Again  the 
empty  idol.  It  is  the  same  with  signs  and  symbols. 

"The  teachings  that  Buddha  received  came  from 
the  same  source  as  did  those  of  Osiris,  but  in  a  dif- 
ferent way.  The  teachings  that  Buddha  contacted 
came  from  the  Motherland  direct  to  Burmah, 
brought  there  by  the  Naacals.  Osiris5  teachings  came 
direct  to  him,  as  his  forefathers  lived  in  the  Mother- 
land, and  when  he  was  a  young  man  he  had  gone 
to  the  Motherland  to  study.  After  finishing  his 
studies  he  returned  home,  became  the  leader  of  the 
Atlanteans  and  brought  the  people  back  to  the  wor- 
ship of  the  God  within,  as  they  were  gradually  slip- 
ping back  to  the  dark  concept,  influenced  by  the 
dark  races  about  them. 

"Moses  was  another  leader  whose  followers  and 
chroniclers  deified  him  after  his  time.  He  was  an 
Israelite  and  contacted  the  records  of  the  Babylon- 
ians, receiving  his  teachings  from  them.  These  rec- 
ords form  a  part  of  your  Bible.  What  Moses  saw  and 
learned  from  these  records  was  written  by  him  in 
the  exact  form  and  words.  The  facts  which  he  put 
down  were  badly  distorted  by  translators.  I  could 
go  on  and  recall  many  more. 

"Jesus  saw  and  contacted  all  their  teachings,  then 
in  his  characteristic  manner  he  went  to  the  heart  of 
all  these.  He  went  one  step  farther  than  any  of  them 

If 


THE  LIFE  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

did,  by  glorifying  his  body  to  the  point  where  he 
could  allow  it  to  be  crucified ;  yet  he  brought  it  forth 
in  a  triumphant  resurrection. 

"Studying  the  teachings  of  Osiris,  Buddha,  and 
Jesus,  you  will  find  many  similarities;  in  fact,  at 
times  you  will  find  the  same  words  used.  Yet  did 
any  of  them  copy?  The  teachings  showed  them  the 
way  from  the  outer  to  the  inner.  Then  they  must 
have  dropped  all  teaching,  all  copying,  and  must 
have  gone  beyond  it  all.  Had  any  of  them  just  copied 
and  studied  what  they  saw  and  were  taught,  and 
then  had  not  been  able  to  see  that  all  was  from  the 
God  right  within  themselves,  they  would  have  been 
studying  yet,  and  their  lives  and  experiences  would 
never  have  been  recorded. 

"They  all  went  through  the  same  experience  in 
that  their  followers  wanted  to  crown  them  kings  of 
temporal  kingdoms ;  but  to  this  they  would  not  listen, 
each  expressing  the  same  thought  in  almost  the  same 
words,  cMy  kingdom  is  not  of  the  material,  it  is 
spiritual'  With  Crisis  it  went  so  far  that  the  later 
chroniclers  placed  him  as  an  Egyptian  king.'5 

Here  the  talk  ended  and  we  all  walked  to  the 
temple.  As  we  arrived  in  the  lower  room,  our  friend 
began,  "In  ascending  from  room  to  room  of  this 
temple,  please  remember  that  no  man  can  confer 
any  rights  upon  another.  By  developing  your  under- 
standing you  will  find  that  you  are  the  equal  of  any 
man,  and  he  who  attempts  to  confer  his  rights  or 
what  he  has  upon  you  is  not  consistent,  as  he  is 
attempting  to  give  what  he  can  not.  One  may  point 
the  way  to  his  brother,  that  he  may  extend  his  vision 
to  incorporate  the  good ;  but  he  can  not  confer  that 
good  which  he  himself  has,  upon  him." 

By  this  time  we  had  arrived  in  the  second  room, 


TEACHING  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

where  four  of  our  friends  from  the  village  had  pre- 
ceded us.  After  a  few  moments  of  genera!  talk,  all 
were  seated,  and  our  teacher  resumed. (^There  is 
not  a  character  in  all  your  history  that  stands  out  as 
Jesus  does.  You  count  your  time  before  and  after 
his  birth.  He  is  idolized  by  a  majority  of  your  people, 
and  that  is  where  they  err.  Instead  of  the  idol,  he 
should  be  the  ideaTJTnstead  of  being  made  into  a 
graven  image,  he  should  be  real  and  living  to  you, 
for  he  actually  lives  today  in  the  same  body  in  which 
he  was  crucified.  He  lives  and  can  talk  to  you  just 
as  he  could  before  that  event.  The  great  error  with 
so  many  is  that  they  see  his  life  ending  in  sorrow  and 
death  upon  the  cross,  forgetting  entirely  that  the 
greater  portion  of  his  life  is  that  portion  after  the 
resurrection.  He  is  able  to  teach  and  heal,  today,  far 
more  than  he  ever  did  before.  You  can  come  into  His 
presence  at  any  time  if  you  will.  If  you  seek,  you 
will  find  him.  He  is  not  a  king  who  can  intrude  his 
presence  upon  you,  but  a  mighty  brother  who  stands 
ready  always,  to  help  you  and  to  help  the  world. 
When  he  lived  upon  the  mortal,,  earthly  plane,  he 
was  able  to  reach  but  a  few.  Today  he  is  able  to  reach 
all  who  will  look  to  him. 

"Did  he  not  say:  'Where  I  am,  there  you  are 
also'?  Does  that  mean  that  he  is  away  in  a  place 
called  heaven  that  you  must  die  to  attain?  He  is 
where  you  are,  and  he  is  able  to  walk  and  talk  with 
you.  Lift  your  sight  a  little  higher  and  let  it  extend 
to  a  wider  horizon;  and  if  your  heart  and  thought 
are  sincerely  with  him,  you  will  see  him.  You  may 
walk  and  talk  with  him.  If  you  look  closely  you  will 
find  the  scars  of  the  cross,  the  spear  and  the  thorns, 
all  healed,  all  gone,  and  the  radiant  love  and  hap- 


THE  LIFE  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

plness  about  him  will  tell  you  that  they  are  all  for- 
gotten, forgiven/5 

Our  friend  stopped  talking,  and  all  was  deep 
silence  for  the  space  of  about  five  minutes.  Then  the 
room  lighted  up  with  a  brilliance  that  we  had  not 
seen  before.  We  heard  a  voice.  At  first  it  seemed  a 
long  way  off  and  indistinct.  After  our  attention  was 
attracted  to  it  and  our  thoughts  directed  to  it,  the 
voice  became  very  distinct  and  rang  out  in  clear  bell- 
like  tones. 

One  of  our  party  asked,  "Who  is  speaking?"  Our 
Chief  said,  "Please  be  silent.  Our  dear  Master,  Jesus, 
is  speaking.55  Then  one  of  our  friends  said,  "You  are 
right,  Jesus  speaks.*' 

Then  the  voice  went  on,  "When  I  said  *I  am  the 
way,  the  truth  and  the  life/  I  did  not  intend  to  con- 
vey the  thought  to  mankind  that  I,  myself,  was^  the 
only  true  light.  £As  many  as  are  led  by  the  Spirit  of 
God,  they  are  Sons  of  God/  When  I  said,  'I  am  the 
perfect  Son,  the  only  begotten  Son  of  God  in  whom 
the  Father  is  well  pleased,3  I  fully  intended  to  con- 
vey the  thought  to  all  mankind  that  one  of  God's 
children  saw,  understood,  and  claimed  his  divinity ; 
saw  that  he  lived,  moved,  and  had  his  being  in  God, 
the  great  Father-Mother  Principle  of  all  things ;  that 
seeing  this,  he  then  spoke  forth  the  word  that  he  was 
the  Christ,  the  only  begotten  Son  of  God,  and  with 
true  heart  and  steadfast  purpose  lived  the  life,  becom- 
ing what  he  claimed  to  be.  With  his  eyes  fixed  upon 
that  ideal,  he  filled  his  whole  body  with  that  ideal, 
and  the  end  sought  was  fulfilled. 

"The  reason  so  many  have  not  seen  me  is  that 
they  have  put  me  upon  a  shrine  and  placed  me  in 
the  unapproachable.  They  have  surrounded  me  with 
miracles  and  mystery ;  and  again,  they  have  placed 

14 


TEACHING  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE   FAR  EAST 

me  far  from  the  common  people,  whom  I  love  dearly 
I  love  them  with  a  love  that  Is  unspeakable.  1  have 
not  withdrawn  from  them;  they  have  withdraw! 
from  me.  They  have  set  up  veils,  walls  and  partitions, 
mediators,  and  images  of  myself  and  those  so  neai 
and  dear  to  me.  They  have  surrounded  us  with  myth 
and  mystery  until  we  seem  so  far  removed  from  these 
dear  ones  that  they  do  not  know  how  to  approach. 
They  pray  and  supplicate  my  dear  mother  and  those 
that  surround  me,  and  thus  they  hold  us  all  in  mortal 
thought.  When  truly,  if  they  would  know  us  as  we 
are5  they  would  and  could  shake  our  hands.  If  they 
would  drop  all  superstition  and  creed  and  know  us 
as  we  are,  they  could  talk  with  us  as  you  do.  We  are 
no  different  at  any  time  than  as  you  see  us.  How  we 
would  love  to  have  the  whole  world  know  this.  Then 
what  an  awakening,  what  a  reunion,  what  a  feast ! 

"You  have  surrounded  us  so  long  in  mystery,  it 
is  no  wonder  that  doubt  and  disbelief  have  become 
dominant.  The  more  you  build  images  and  idols  and 
surround  us  with  death  and  make  us  unapproachable, 
save  through  some  other  than  ourselves,  the  deeper 
the  doubt  and  shadow  will  be  cast  and  the  chasm 
of  superstition  grow  wider  and  more  difficult  to  cross. 
If  you  would  boldly  shake  our  hands  and  say,  CI  know 
you/  then  all  could  see  and  know  us  as  we  are.  There 
is  no  mystery  surrounding  us,  or  those  we  love,  for 
we  love  the  whole  world. 

uSo  many  see  only  that  part  of  my  life  which 
ended  on  the  cross,  forgetting  that  the  greater  part 
is  as  I  am  now;  forgetting  entirely  that  man  still 
lives,  even  after  what  seems  a  violent  death.  Life 
cannot  be  destroyed.  It  goes  on  and  on,  and  a  life 
well  lived  never  degenerates  nor  passes.  Even  the 
flesh  may  be  immortalized  so  that  it  never  changes. 


THE  LIFE  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

"Dear  Pilate,  when  he  washed  his  hands  and  said? 
*Away  with  him  and  crucify  him  yourselves,  I  find 
no  fault  in  him/  how  little  he  knew  of  the  history  he 
was  making,  or  of  the  prophecy  he  was  fulfilling.  He, 
with  the  multitude,  has  suffered  far  more  than  I  have 
suffered.  That  is  all  passed  and  forgotten,  forgiven, 
as  you  will  see  by  our  all  standing  here  in  one  place 
together." 

Two  figures  came  forth  and  were  embraced  by 
Jesus.  As  he  stood  with  his  hand  on  the  shoulder  of 
one,  he  said,  "This  dear  brother  has  come  all  the 
way  with  me.  While  this  one,"  pointing  to  the  sec- 
ond one,  "saw  many  more  trails  before  his  eyes 
were  opened.  But  after  they  were  fully  opened,  he 
came  quickly.  He  is  just  as  true  and  we  love  him 
with  the  same  love  we  do  all  others." 

Then  another  advanced  slowly  and  stood  for  a 
moment.  Jesus  turned  and  with  outstretched  arms 
said,  "Dear  Pilate."  There  was  no  mistaking  the 
comradeship  of,  the  embrace. 

Then  Pilate  spoke  and  said,  "I  labored  and  suf- 
fered many  weary  years  after  the  verdict  which  I 
pronounced  that  day  so  lightly  when  I  cast  from 
myself  the  burden.  How  few  of  us  while  in  the 
material  realize  the  needless  burdens  we  heap  upon 
others  in  the  attempt  to  shift  the  responsibility  from 
ourselves.  It  is  only  when  our  eyes  are  opened  that 
we  realize  the  more  we  attempt  to  shirk  and  shift 
our  burdens  upon  others,  the  greater  the  burden 
bears  down  trpon  us.  It  took  many  weary  years  before 
my  eyes  were  opened  to  this  fact ;  but  since  the  day 
they  were  opened,  how  I  have  rejoiced." 

Then  the  invisible  choir  burst  into  full  song,  and 
the  melody  beggars  all  description.  After  a  few  bars, 
Jesus  stepped  forward  and  said,  "Do  you  wonder 

16 


TEACHING  OF  THE   MASTERS  OF  THE   FAR   EAST 

that  I  have  long  ago  forgiven  those  that  nailed  me 
to  the  cross?  Then  why  have  not  all  forgiven,  as  I 
have?  With  me  the  forgiveness  was  complete  when 
1  said,  *It  is  finished.9  Why  do  you  not  see  me  as  I  am, 
not  nailed  to  the  cross,  but  risen  above  all  mortality?9' 

Again  the  invisible  choir  continued  with  "Hail, 
all  hail,  you  Sons  of  God.  Hail,  hail  and  praise  Him, 
His  kingdom  endures  forever  among  men.  Lo,  God 
Is  with  you  always";  and  as  they  sang,  the  words 
stood  out  in  raised  letters  upon  the  wall  of  the  room. 

This  was  not  a  far-off, '  hazy,  nearly  invisible 
scene.  Neither  was  it  set  on  a  stage  far  away  from  us. 
All  were  actually  present  in  the  room,  for  we  talked 
with  them,  shook  hands  with  them,  and  photo- 
graphed them.  They  were  right  among  us,  and  we 
were  around  them.  The  only  difference  that  we 
could  see  between  them  and  ourselves  was  the  pecu- 
liar light  about  them,  and  this  appeared  to  be  the 
source  of  the  light  in  the  room.  There  were  no 
shadows  anywhere.  To  us  there  seemed  to  be  a  pecu- 
liar translucent  quality  about  the  flesh,  for  when  we 
touched  them  or  clasped  their  hands,  the  flesh 
seemed  like  alabaster.  Still  it  had  a  warm,  friendly 
glow,  and  that  same  warmth  pervaded  everything 
about  them.  Even  after  they  had  walked  out,  the 
room  we  were  in  retained  the  same  warmth  and 
light.  Every  time  we  entered  the  room  afterward, 
some  of  the  party  would  remark  about  it. 

One  day,  a  short  time  after,  our  party  had  gath- 
ered in  the  room,  and  we  were  talking  of  how  the 
room  impressed  us,  when  our  Chief  said  to  me,  "It 
is  sublime."  He  had  expressed  the  feelings  of  every- 
one and  there  was  no  more  said  about  it.  When  we 
returned  that  fall,  the  room  seemed  a  sanctuary,  and 
we  spent  many  hours  there. 


THE  LIFE  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

Our  party  waited  while  the  others  filed  from  the 
room.  As  Pilate  started  to  leave,  he  motioned  our 
Chief  to  join  him  and  together  all  descended  the 
stairs,  down  to  the  lower  room  through  the  passage- 
way to  the  crevasse  and  down  the  ladder,  one  by  one, 
until  all  had  descended.  Then  we  went  on  to  the  vil- 
lage to  the  home  where  we  lived,  and  we  all  talked 
until  midnight.  Then  all  dispersed  in  the  usual  man- 
ner, as  if  the  meeting  were  a  common  occurrence. 

After  the  guests  had  departed,  we  gathered 
around  our  hostess  and  each  in  turn  clasped  her  hand 
to  thank  her  for  the  remarkable  evening  we  had 
experienced."One  of  our  party  said,  "The  only  way 
I  can  express  my  thoughts  and  feelings  is  to  say  that 
my  narrow,  mortal  outlook  has  beenxompletely  shat- 
tered." He  apparently  struck  the  key  that  vibrated 
to  all  our  thoughts.  I  did  not  attempt  to  give  voice  to 
my  thoughts  or  feelings;  neither  have  I  ever  at- 
tempted to  record  them.  I  shall  leave  that  for  the 
reader  to  imagine.  After  leaving  our  hostess,  to  retire, 
there  was  not  a  word  spoken.  Each  one  seemed  to 
feel  that  an  entire  new  world  had  opened. 


18 


CHAPTER  II 

THE  next  morning,  after  we  had  gathered  for 
breakfast,  we  questioned  our  hostess  and 
found  that  it  was  not  an  uncommon  occurrence 
for  Jesus  to  come  as  he  did;  and  she  said  he  often 
came  and  joined  the  others  in  their  healing  work. 
After  breakfast  we  found  that  our  hostess  and 
two  other  ladies  were  to  accompany  us  to  the  temple 
that  day.  As  we  left  the  house,  two  men  joined  the 
party.  One  told  our  hostess  that  there  was  a  sick 
child  in  the  village  who  was  asking  for  her.  We  fol- 
lowed the  men  to  the  home  of  the  child  and  found 
it  very  ill.  Our  hostess  walked  forward  and  held  out 
her  hands.  The  mother  placed  the  child  in  her  arms, 
instantly  the  little  one's  face  brightened.  Then  it 
snuggled  up  close  for  a  moment,  and  in  a  few  min- 
utes was  sound  asleep.  Our  hostess  returned  the  child 
to  the  mother,  and  we  proceeded  to  the  temple.  On 
the  way  she  remarked,  "Oh,  if  these  dear  people 
would  only  see  and  do  this  work  for  themselves,  in- 
stead of  depending  upon  us.  It  would  be  so  much 
better  for  them.  As  it  is,  they  let  us  entirely  alone 
until  some  emergency  arises,  then  they  call  for  us, 
which  is  quite  all  right,  except  that  it  does  not  give 
them  any  self-reliance  whatever.  We  would  much 
prefer  to  see  them  self-reliant,  but  they  are  child- 
like in  every  way/1 

By  this  time  we  had  reached  the  foot  of  the  lad- 
der. We  went  up  and  entered  the  tunnel  The  two 
men  accompanied  us.  As  this  tunnel  was  through 
solid  rock,  it  was  natural  to  suppose  that  it  would  be 
dark.  But  it  was  lighted  sufficiently  to  enable  us  to 
see  objects  for  a  considerable  distance  ahead;  and 

19 


THE  HFE  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

the  light  seemed  to  be  around  us,  so  that  there  were 
no  shadows.  We  had  noticed  this  the  day  before,  but 
no  one  had  remarked  about  it.  Upon  making  inquiry, 
we  were  told  that  the  light  was  around  us  just  as  it 
appeared  to  be,  and  that  when  there  was  no  one  in 
the  tunnel  it  was  dark. 

We  went  on  through  the  tunnel  and  up  the  stairs 
to  the  third  room.  This  room  was  somewhat  larger 
than  the  two  below,  and  there  were  a  great  many 
tablets  stored  along  two  walls.  Just  back  of  this  room 
we  found  that  another  large  room  had  been  exca- 
vated and  later  learned  that  this  room  was  also  filled 
with  similar  tablets.  These  tablets  were  of  a  reddish 
dark-brown  color,  quite  well  glazed.  Some  were  about 
14x24  inches  and  about  two  inches  thick,  and 
weighed  from  ten  to  twelve  pounds  each.  Others 
were  much  larger.  We  were  puzzled  to  know  how 
these  could  have  been  transported  over  the  moun- 
tains. We  expressed  our  wonderment  at  this  and  were 
told  that  they  were  not  transported  over  the  moun- 
tains, but  were  brought  to  the  Gobi  country  when 
it  was  fertile  and  well  settled,  before  the  mountains 
were  raised.  Then  long  after  the  mountains  came  up, 
the  tablets  were  removed  to  this  place  to  guard 
against  any  possibility  of  their  being  destroyed. 

It  is  claimed  that  before  the  mountains  rose,  a 
great  tidal  wave  ran  over  a  portion  of  the  country, 
totally  devastating  it  and  destroying  a  large  part  of 
the  population.  Those  who  survived  were  cut  off 
from  the  world  and  a  means  of  livelihood,  and  they 
became  the  forefathers  of  the  roving  bands  of  brig- 
ands which  infest  the  Gobi  at  this  time.  It  is  claimed 
that  the  Great  Uigur  Empire  existed  where  the 
Himalayas  and  the  Gobi  are  today ;  that  large  cities 
of  a  people  in  a  high  state  of  civilization  existed  there 

20 


TEACHING  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

and  that  drifting  sand  covered  the  ruins  after  they 
were  destroyed  by  the  water.  We  afterwards  took 
the  descriptions  as  they  were  translated  to  us  from 
the  tablets  and  found  three  of  these  cities;  and  we 
believe  that  some  day  when  further  excavations  are 
completed,  they  will  prove  the  authenticity  of  these 
records  and  that  which  is  claimed  for  them.  These 
records  place  the  date  of  this  civilization  back  hun- 
dreds of  thousands  of  years.  As  this  is  not  a  treatise 
on  research,  I  feel  that  I  have  digressed. 

We  were  shown  through  the  different  rooms* 
During  the  general  conversation  it  developed  that 
one  of  the  men  who  joined  our  party  in  the  morning 
was  a  descendant  of  the  man  whom  we  met  in  the 
village  where  John  the  Baptist  had  lived,  and  whom 
we  called  our  friend  of  the  records.  This  man  showed 
every  sign  of  advanced  years,  which  caused  us  to 
wonder. 

While  we  were  returning  to  the  first  room,  our 
Chief  asked  if  a  desire  could  be  fulfilled  as  soon  as  it 
was  expressed.  Our  hostess  answered  that  if  the 
desire  were  put  forth  in  true  form  it  would  be  ful- 
filled. She  then  went  on  to  say  that  desire  is  but  a 
form  of  prayer,  that  it  was  the  true  form  of  prayer 
which  Jesus  used,  as  his  prayers  were  answered ;  that 
prayer  which  is  always  answered  must  be  true 
prayer,  therefore  must  be  scientific,  and  if  scientific, 
must  be  according  to  fixed  law. 

Continuing,  she  said,  "The  law  is  cAs  you  know, 
your  prayer  is  granted/  and  'What  things  you  desire, 
when  you  pray,  know  you  receive  them  and  you  shall 
have  them/  If  we  know  positively  that  whatever  we 
have  asked  for  is  ours  already,  we  may  know  that 
we  are  working  in  accordance  with  law.  If  the  desire 
is  filled,  then  we  may  know  that  the  law  is  fulfilled. 


THE  LIFE  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

If  the  desire  is  not  filled,  then  we  must  know  that  we 
have  asked  amiss.  We  should  know  that  the  fault  is 
with  us  and  not  with  God. 

"Then  the  instructions  are,  'You  shall  love  the 
Lord,  your  God,  with  all  your  heart,  with  all  your 
soul,  with  all  your  mind,  and  with  all  your  strength/ 
Now  go  deep,  deep  down  within  your  own  soul  — 
not  with  forebodings,  fear,  and  unbelief,  but  with  a 
glad,  free,  thankful  heart,  knowing  that  that  which 
you  stand  in  need  of  is  already  yours. 

"The  secret  lies  in  getting  the  at-one-ment ;  get- 
ting the  consciousness  of  it  and  then  holding  firmly 
and  never  deviating,  though  all  earth  should  oppose. 
*Of  myself  I  can  do  nothing/  said  Jesus,  'The  Father 
that  dwells  in  me,  He  does  the  work.9  Have  faith  in 
God.  Have  faith  and  doubt  not.  Have  faith  and  fear 
not.  Now  remember  there  is  no  limitation  to  God's 
power.  'All  things  are  possible/ 

"Use  positive  words  in  making  your  request. 
There  is  naught  but  the  perfect  condition  desired. 
Then  plant  in  your  soul  the  perfect  seed  idea  and 
that  alone.Wow  ask  to  manifest  health  and  not  to  be 
healed  of  disease;  to  express  harmony  and  realize 
abundance — not  to  be  delivered  from  inharmony^ 
misery  and  limitations.  Throw  these  off  as  you  would 
discard  an  old  garment.  They  are  old  and  only  out- 
grown things;  you  can  afford  to  discard  them  joy- 
fully. Do  not  even  turn  to  gaze  upon  them.  They  are 
forgiven,  forgotten.  They  have  returned  to  the  dust 
from  which  they  were  created.  They  are  no-thing — 
nothing. 

"Fill  the  seeming  blank  spaces  about  you  with 
the  thought  of  God,  Infinite  Good.  Then  remember 
the  word  God  is  a  seed.  It  must  grow. 

"Leave  the  how,  when,  and  where  to  God.  Your 


22 


TEACHING  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

work  is  merely  to  say  what  you  want,  and  to  give 
forth  blessings,  knowing  that  the  moment  you  have 
asked,  you  have  received.  All  the  details  of  this  bring- 
ing forth  Is  the  work  of  the  Father.  Remember  He 
does  the  work.  Do  faithfully  your  part;  leave  and 
trust  God's  part  to  Him.  Ask.  Affirm.  Look  to  God 
for  what  you  want;  then  receive  God's  fulfillment. 

"Keep  the  thought  of  God's  abundance  always 
in  mind.  If  any  other  thought  comes,  replace  It  with 
that  of  God's  abundance,  and  bless  that  abundance. 
Give  thanks  constantly,  if  need  be,  that  the  work 
is  done.  Do  not  go  back  again  to  the  asking.  Just 
bless  and  give  thanks  that  the  work  Is  done,  that 
God  Is  working  In  you,  that  you  are  receiving  that 
which  you  desire ;  for  you  desire  only  the  good  that 
you  may  give  out  the  good  to  all.  Let  this  be  in  silence 
and  In  secret.  Pray  to  your  Father  in  secret,  and  your 
Father  who  sees  the  secret  of  your  soul  will  reward 
you  openly. 

"When  the  demonstration  Is  complete,  you  will 
look  back  upon  the  time  faithfully  given,  as  one  of 
your  greatest  treasures.  You  will  have  proved  the 
law,  and  you  will  realize  the  power  of  your  word 
spoken  in  faith  and  blessing.  Remember  that  God 
has  perfected  His  plan.  He  has  poured  out  and  is 
continuously  pouring  out,  loving  and  lavishly  upon 
us,  all  good,  and  every  good  thing  that  we  can  desire. 
Again  He  says,  'Try  Me  and  see  If  I  will  not  open 
the  windows  of  heaven  and  pour  out  such  a  blessing 
there  will  not  be  room  to  receive  it.* 

With  All  My  Heart 

"In  the  heart  of  my  being,  Father,  I  am  one  with 
You,  and  I  recognize  You  as  Being,  the  Father  of  all. 
You  are  Spirit,  Omnipresent,  Omnipotent,  Omms- 

23 


THE  MFE  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

cient  You  are  Wisdom,  Love,  and  Truth ;  the  power 
and  substance  and  intelligence  of  which  .and  through 
which  all  things  are  created.  You  are  tfcfe  life  of  my 

spirit,  the  substance  of  my  soul,  the  intelligence  of 
my  thought ;  I  am  expressing  You  in  my  body  and 

in  my  affairs.  You  are  the  beginning  and  the  end,  the 
•very  All  of  the  good  which  I  can  express.  The  desire 
of  my  thought  which  is  implanted  in  my  soul  is 
quickened  by  Your  life  in  my  spirit ;  and  in  the  full- 
ness  of  time,  through  the  law  of  faith,  it  is  brought 
into  visibility  in  my  experience.  I  know  that  the  good 
I  desire  already  exists  in  Spirit  in  invisible  form  and 
but  awaits  the  fulfillment  of  the  law  to  be  made  vis- 
ible, and  I  know  that  already  I  have. 

With  All  My  Soul 

"The  words  which  I  now  speak,  outline  to  You, 
my  Father,  that  which  I  desire.  As  a  seed  it  is  planted 
in  the  soil  of  my  soul  and  moved  upon  by  Your  quick- 
ening life  in  my  spirit.  It  must  come  forth.  I  allow 
only  Your  Spirit — Wisdom,  Love,  and  Truth — to 
move  in  my  soul.  I  desire  only  that  which  is  good  for 
all,  and  I  now  ask  You,  Father,  to  bring  it  forth. 

"Father  within  me,  I  ask  to  express  Love,  Wis- 
dom, Strength,  and  Eternal  Youth.  I  ask  to  realize 
Harmony,  Happiness,  and  Abundant  Prosperity; 
that  I  may  have  the  understanding  direct  from  You, 
of  the  method  of  bringing  forth  from  the  Universal 
Substance  that  which  will  satisfy  every  good  desire. 
This  is  not  for  self,  Father,  but  that  I  may  have  the 
understanding  so  that  I  may  be  of  service  to  all 
Your  children. 

With  All  My  Mind 
"That  which  I  desire  is  already  in  visible  form. 


TEACHING  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

1  form  in  mind  only  that  which  I  desire.  As  a  seed 
begins  its  growth  underground  in  the  quiet  and  in 
the  dark,  so  does  my  desire  now  take  form  In  the 
silent,  invisible  realm  of  my  soul.  I  enter  my  closet 
and  shut  the  door.  Quietly  and  confidently  1  now 
hold  my  desire  in  mind  as  already  fulfilled.  Father, 
I  now  await  the  perfect  outpicturing  of  my  desire* 
Father,  Father,  within  me,  I  thank  You  that  now 
in  the  invisible,  the  fulfillment  of  my  desire  is  always 
established,  and  I  know  that  You  have  poured  out 
lovingly  and  lavishly  to  all  an  abundance  of  Your 
treasure ;  that  You  have  filled  every  good  desire  of 
my  life ;  that  I  may  partake  of  Your  opulent  supply ; 
that  I  may  realize  my  oneness  with  You;  that  all 
Your  children  may  realize  the  same ;  and  that  what- 
ever I  have,  I  may  pour  out  to  help  all  Your  chil- 
dren. All  that  I  have  I  give  to  You,  Father. 

With  All  My  Strength 

"No  act  or  thought  of  mine  shall  deny  that  I 
have  already  received  in  Spirit  the  fulfillment  of 
my  desire,  and  it  is  now  brought  forth  into  perfect 
visibility.  In  spirit,  in  soul,  in  mind,  in  body,  I  am 
true  to  my  desire.  I  have  perceived  my  good  in 
Spirit.  I  have  conceived  it  as  a  perfect  idea  in  soul, 
and  I  have  given  true  thought  form  to  my  desire. 
I  now  bring  into  visibility,  or  true  manifestation,  my 
perfect  desire. 

"I  thank  You,  Father,  that  I  now  have  Love,  Wis- 
dom, and  Understanding;  Life,  Health,  Strength 
and  Eternal  Youth ;  Harmony,  Happiness  and  Abun- 
dant Prosperity ;  and  the  method  of  bringing  forth 
from  the  Universal  Substance  that  which  will  satisfy 
every  good  desire. 

cc  'Said  I  not  unto  you,  that  if  you  would  believe, 
you  should  see  the  glory  of  God?* f* 


THE  LIFE  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

After  our  hostess  had  spoken,  there  was  deep 
silence  for  a  moment ;  then  she  continued :  "Under- 
stand  that  if  it  is  not  finished,  and  your  desire  is  not 
now  visible,  the  fault  is  within  yourselves  and  not 
with  God.  Do  not  go  back  again  to  the  asking,  but 
like  Elijah,  persist,  hold  out  the  cup  until  It  is  filled  ; 
pour  out  blessings  and  thanks  that  it  is  done  now, 
though  every  mortal  thought  of  error  beset  you. 
Go  on,  go  on,  it  is  here  now,  and  believe  me  your 
faith  is  rewarded;  your  faith  becomes  knowing. 

"We  will  suppose  it  is  ice  you  desire.  Would  you 
begin  by  speaking  out  the  word,  ice,  all  about  you 
Indiscriminately?  If  you  did,  you  would  scatter  your 
forces  in  all  directions  and  nothing  would  come  to 
you.  You  should  first  form  a  mental  picture  of  what 
you  desire,  hold  it  directly  in  thought  just  long 
enough  to  get  the  image,  then  drop  the  image  en- 
tirely and  look  directly  Into  the  Universal  God  Sub- 
stance. Know  that  that  Substance  is  a  part  of  God, 
and  therefore  a  part  of  you  and  in  that  Substance 
there  Is  everything  you  need ;  that  God  is  pressing 
that  Substance  out  to  you  just  as  fast  as  you  can  use 
it ;  and  that  you  can  never  deplete  the  supply.  Then 
know  that  everyone  who  has  created  that  supply  has 
brought  forth  from  this  Substance,  whether  they 
have  done  It  consciously  or  unconsciously.  Now  with 
your  thought  and  vision  fixed  on  the  one  central 
atom,  God,  hold  that  atom  until  you  have  imprinted 
your  desire  upon  It.  You  will  lower  the  vibration  of 
that  atom  until  it  becomes  Ice.  Then  all  the  atoms 
surrounding  that  one  will  hasten  to  obey  your  desire. 
Their  vibration  will  be  lowered  until  they  will 
adhere  to  the  central  particle,  and  In  a  moment  you 
will  have  ice.  You  do  not  even  need  any  water  about 
you ;  you  need  only  the  ideal." 


TEACHING  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

Again  there  was  deep  silence ;  in  a  moment  a  pic- 
ture appeared  upon  the  wall  of  the  room.  At  first 
the  forms  were  still,  and  we  thought  but  little  of  it. 
But  then  the  forms  began  to  move  about,  and  we 
could  see  their  lips  move  as  though  they  were  talk- 
ing. Immediately  our  attention  became  fixed,  and  our 
hostess  said,  "This  picture  is  depicting  a  scene  that 
happened  long  ago,  when  the  Uigur  Empire  was  at 
its  height.  You  can  see  how  beautiful  the  people  are* 
and  the  country  is  warm  and  sunny.  You  can  see 
how  the  trees  are  swayed  by  the  breezes.  Even  the 
colors  are  reproduced.  There  were  no  fierce  storms 
to  disturb  the  land  or  its  inhabitants.  If  you  will  give 
close  attention  you  will  hear  them  speak ;  and  if  you 
can  understand  the  language,  you  can  tell  what  they 
are  talking  about.  You  can  even  see  the  play  of  the 
muscles  of  the  body  as  they  move  about/1 

Our  hostess  ceased  speaking,  but  the  pictures 
continued  to  pour  in,  with  scenes  changing  at  inter- 
vals of  about  two  minutes,  until  we  seemed  to  be 
a  part  of  the  picture,  so  close  did  they  appear  to  us. 
Suddenly  there  came  a  scene  with  three  of  our  party 
in  it.  There  was  no  mistaking  them.  We  could  hear 
their  voices  and  recognize  what  they  were  talking 
about.  It  proved  to  be  an  incident  that  had  taken 
place  in  South  America  about  ten  years  previous. 

Then  our  hostess  resumed,  "We  are  able  to 
throw  thought  vibrations  into  the  atmosphere  which 
connect  with  the  thought  vibrations  of  those  that 
have  passed,  and  our  vibrations  collect  those  of  the 
thoughts  gone  before  until  they  draw  them  together 
at  a  given  point.  Then  you  are  able  to  see  those 
scenes  reproduced  just  as  they  were  when  the  scenes 
occurred.  This  may  seem  phenomenal  to  you,  but  it 
will  not  be  long  before  your  people  will  be  producing 


THE  LIFE  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

pictures  similar  to  these  you  have  seen.  The  only 
difference  is  that  they  will  be  photographic  and 
mechanical,  while  ours  are  neither. 

"The  leaders  of  Christian  thought  have  been  so 
busy  with  their  interdenominational  bickerings,  each 
one  determined  that  the  other  should  not  succeed, 
that  they  have  nearly  forgotten  what  true  spiritual 
life  means.  Likewise  the  Oriental  people  ^  have  set 
themselves  so  determinedly  upon  the  esoteric,  occult, 
and  scientific  side  of  their  philosophy,  that  they  have 
also  passed  over  the  spiritual. 

"It  will  come  to  a  point  where  a  few  of  those 
who  develop  the  pictures  through  mechanical  means, 
to  their  higher  degree  of  perfection,  will  be  the  first 
to  see  the  true  spiritual  meaning.,  the  educational 
value,  the  benefit  to  be  derived,  and  the  accomplish- 
ments that  are  possible.  Then  those  ^few  will  have 
the  courage  to  step  forth  and  proclaim  the  accom- 
plishment by  the  pictures  they  produce.  It  will  be 
seen  that  these  devices  and  the  people  that  develop 
them— now  thought  to  be  the  most  material — will 
be  the  greatest  power  of  any  factor  brought  forth 
and  developed  by  your  people,  in  bringing  out  the 
true  spiritual  ideal.  Thus  it  will  be  left  to  those  who 
seem  to  be  the  most  material  of  the  greatest  material 
race,  to  bring  forth  the  truly  spiritual.  Your  people 
are  going  on,  and  will  bring  forth  a  device  which 
will  reproduce  the  voices  of  those  who  have  passed, 
more  accurately  than  they  now  reproduce  the  voices 
of  the  living.  You  are  going  on  and  will  achieve,  in 
a  measure,  mechanically,  what  we  do  with  thought 
force.  This  is  where  you  are  going  to  excel  all  the 
world  in  future  development. 

"The  founding  of  America  portrays  the  white 
race's  homecoming,  as  that  land  is  their  former  home 

28 


TEACHING  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

and  one  of  the  places  where  the  great  early  spiritual 
enlightenment  was  brought  forth.  Thus  It  is  the  land 
where  the  greatest  spiritual  awakening  will  take 
place.  In  a  short  time  you  will  be  far  ahead  of  the 
whole  world  in  physical  and  mechanical  develop- 
ment. You  will  go  on  and  develop  the  physical  and 
mechanical  until  it  is  perfected  to  such  a  degree  that 
you  will  see  there  is  but  one  more  step  to  the  spir- 
itual. When  that  time  comes,  you  will  have  the  cour- 
age to  take  the  step.  There  is  a  saying  in  your 
country  that  necessity  is  the  mother  of  invention. 
Necessity  placed  you  in  a  position  where  you  were 
obliged  to  do  that  which  seemed  impossible.  Your 
mode  of  accomplishment  has  made  you  a  very  ma- 
terial nation.  With  your  mode  of  living,  this  has  been 
necessary  in  order  to  survive.  When  you,  as  a  nation, 
do  touch  the  spiritual  realm,  the  strides  that  you 
have  made  in  the  material  will  seem  like  child's  play. 
With  the  strong  physical  bodies  and  quick  percep- 
tion you  have  developed,  your  race  will  become  a 
light  to  all  other  nations;  and  you  will  look  back 
and  wonder,  as  you  are  now  looking  back  and  won- 
dering why  your  forefathers  used  the  stage-coach 
and  the  tallow  candle  when  steam  and  electricity 
were  all  around  them,  just  as  it  is  around  you  today. 
Had  they  abided  by  the  law,  they  would  have 
received  and  benefited  as  you  have  and  will. 

"You  will  find  that  the  spiritual  surrounds  and  is 
above  the  material.  You  will  find  that  in  the  spiritual 
there  is  a  higher  law,  and  when  you  abide  by  that 
law,  you  receive  the  benefit ;  for  the  spiritual  is  just 
above  and  around  the  mechanical  or  material.  You 
will  find  there  is  no  more  mystery  in  the  spiritual 
than  there  is  in  the  mechanical  or  the  material. 
The  things  that  appear  difficult  to  you  now  will  be 


THE  LIFE  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

simple,  and  you  will  surmount  them  just  as  readily 
as  you  are  now  surmounting  the  mechanical  'and 
material.  It  is  the  continual  striving  that  does  the 
work.55 

By  this  time  the  old  gentleman  whom  I  spoke  of 
before,  had  selected  and  brought  out  a  tablet  and 
placed  it  on  a  nearby  easel. 

Our  hostess  went  on  to  say,  "The  great  error 
which  many  people  make  is  that  they  do  not  look 
upon  lessons  as  a  means  of  attaining  a  given  end. 
They  do  not  realize  that  when  that  end  is  attained 
and  fully  recognized,  the  lessons  are  to  be  discarded 
and  the  attainment  is  to  be'  followed.  Then  if  they 
still  wish  to  go  on,  they  may  pause  for  a  moment 
and  place  what  they  have  accomplished  in  their 
storehouse  (sometimes  called  the  subconscious) ;  and 
after  this  step  the  lessons  leading  to  the  further 
attainment  which  they  seek,  may  be  taken  up.  But 
as  soon  as  the  goal  is  reached  they  must  again  dis- 
card the  lessons.  In  this  way  they  may  go  on,  step 
by  step,  to  the  highest  attainment.  You  will  find  that 
lessons  are  but  steps  in  the  stairway ;  and  if  you  were 
to  attempt  to  carry  all  the  steps  you  have  used,  to 
reach  the  top,  the  load  would  soon  crush  you.  Be- 
sides, there  would  be  no  steps  for  your  brother  to 
use  as  he  follows  on.  Leave  the  steps  for  him  to  use 
if  he  chooses.  They  have  assisted  you  to  reach  the 
top.  You  do  not  need  them  any  longer.  You  may 
pause  a  moment  for  breath  or  for  a  fresh  inspiration 
to  go  on.  The  moment  that  inspiration  has  come,  you 
can  place  your  foot  upon  the  next  step  and  again 
place  the  attainment  in  the  storehouse.  Let  go  of  all 
the  lessons  that  brought  you  there  and  there  is 
nothing  to  encumber  or  hold  you  back.  But  if  you 
look  back  to  the  lessons  and  do  not  hold  your  vision 

30 


TEACHING  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

on  the  goal,  you  will,  before  you  realize  it,  have  fixed 

the  lessons  instead  of  the  Ideal  the  lessons  would 
convey. 

"This  may  cause  you  to  waver  and  look  back  and 
say,  'Did  my  ancestors  accomplish  in  the  way  I  have 
accomplished?3  When  I  look  far  back  I  can  say  they 
did,  but  when  I  look  into  the  immediate  future  I  say 
they  did  not ;  for  they  accomplished  by  the  sweat  of 
their  brow?  while  you  are  using  your  own  God-given 
power.  If  you  look  back  to  your  ancestors,  you  will, 
before  you  realize  it,  be  worshipping  them ;  for  with 
your  creative  ability,  you  will  have  brought  forth 
that  which  you  have  gazed  upon.  You  will  be  living 
by  their  standards  of  your  own.  You  will  begin  to 
look  like  your  ancestors,  but  you  will  not  accomplish 
what  they  have  accomplished.  You  will  begin  to 
drop  back ;  for  if  you  live  by  another's  ideal,  you  can 
not  accomplish  that  which  the  one  who  conceived 
the  ideal  accomplished.  Ypu  must  either  go  on  or 
return.  There  are  no  half-way  measures.  This  ances- 
tor worship  is  one  of  the  direct  causes  of  nations* 
degenerating.  Because  of  your  lack  of  ancestor  wor- 
ship we  see  a  great  nation  in  store  for  you.  You  had, 
in  the  first  place,  very  little  pride  of  ancestry ;  you 
had  no  ancestors  to^worship,  and  you  had  no  founda- 
tion save  that  which  you  made.  Your  ideal  was  a 
free  country  and  you  brought  forth  your  ideal  The 
country  you  acquired  had  been  free  from  king  or 
ruler.  To  you  it  did  not  matter  how  your  grand- 
father had  accomplished,  it  was  how  you,  your  own 
individual  self  would  accomplish.  Then  you  united 
with  the  many  to  accomplish  one  purpose,  and  the 
individual  self  in  you,  the  creative  power  that  gives 
you  life  (God),  held  you  in  direct  communion  with 
your  ideal  power  to  create.  Then  with  your  eyes 

3* 


THE  LIFE  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

steadfastly  fixed  on  the  attainment,  you  are  going 
on  to  the  realization  of  your  ideal." 

Our  hostess  turned  to  the  tablet  and  resumed,, 
"On  these  tablets  it  is  recorded  that  God  was  called 
Directive  Principle — Head,  Mind — and  was  symbol- 
ized by  the  character  which  is  like  your  letter  M, 
which  was  called  M-o-o-h.  This  translated  into  your 
language  would  be  director  or  builder. 

"This  Directive  Principle  was  over  all  and  con- 
trolled all  The  first  Being  He  created  was  called  the 
expression  of  the  Directive  Principle;  and  He  was 
created  in  form  just  like  the  Principle,  as  the  Princi- 
ple had  no  form  but  His  own  to  express  by  or 
through.  This  Being  which  the  Directive  Principle 
created,  was  the  outer  expression  of  the  Principle, 
Himself.  He  was  created  in  the  image  of  the  Princi- 
ple, as  the  Directive  Principle  had  no  other  form  to 
pattern  after.  The  Directive  Principle  gave  to  His 
creation  every  one  of  His  attributes,  and  this  crea- 
tion had  access  to  everything  that  the  Principle  had. 
He  was  given  dominion  over  every  outer  form.  He 
had  the  form  of  His  Creator,  the  attributes  of  His 
Creator,  and  the  power  to  express  all  of  them  in  the 
perfect  way  that  the  Creator  expresses,  so  long  as  the 
creation  held  itself  in  direct  accord  with  the  Princi- 
ple. None  of  the  attributes  of  the  created  being  were 
developed ;  but  the  Creator  having  in  mind  the  ideal 
or  perfect  plan  which  His  creation  was  to  express, 
placed  His  creation  In  Ideal  or  perfect  surroundings 
where  all  the  attributes  could  be  brought  forth  and 
expressed  or  brought  Into  outer  manifestation.  Thus 
the^  Creator  did  not  place  His  creation  upon  earth 
until  all  the  conditions  for  its  perfect  development 
Were  complete.  When  these  conditions  were  com- 
plete, this  Being  was  placed  among  them  and  named 

32 


TEACHING  OF  THE   MASTERS  OF  THE   FAR  EAST 

Lord  God,  and  the  location  where  He  was  placed 
was  called  M-o-o-h  or  M,  and  afterward  became 
known  as  the  cradle  or  mother.  I  wish  you  to  observe 
that  I  am  putting  this  Into  words  In  your  language 
so  that  you  can  understand  them.  You  can  go  into 
the  details  later  after  you  have  learned  to  translate 
the  tablets  yourselves.  I  wish  to  bring  these  points 
out  so  that  they  may  become  the  principle  from 
which  we  shall  work  In  translating  these  records. 
I  do  not  wish  you  to  think  that  I  am  attempting  to 
change  any  conclusions  you  have  already  formed  in 
other  ways  or  through  other  thoughts  or  studies.  I 
am  going  to  ask  you  to  lay  them  all  aside  for  the 
time.  When  you  have  gone  deeper  Into  these  studies, 
you  are  at  liberty  to  take  up  all  others  again  if  you 
wish.  I  do  not  wish  to  influence  you  in  any  way.  All 
lessons  are  but  the  outer,  a  way  of  arriving  at  a  con- 
clusion. If  the  conclusion  is  not  reached,  or  the  aim 
sought  is  not  attained,  the  lessons  become  driftwood, 
extra  baggage,  nothing." 


33 


CHAPTER  III 

DAY  after  day  for  two  mouthy  with  the  old 
man  as  our  instructor,  we  gave  our  whole 
attention  to  a  set  of  tablets  which  dealt  en- 
tirely with  characters,  symbols,,  and  their  position, 
plan,  and  meaning.  One  morning  early  in  March, 
we  went  to  the  room  in  the  temple,  as  usual,  and 
found  the  old  gentleman  lying  on  the  couch  as 
though  asleep.  One  of  our  party  walked  over  and 
placed  a  hand  on  his  arm  to  arouse  him;  then 
started  back,  and  exclaimed,  "He  is  not  breathing. 
I  believe  he  is  dead."  We  gathered  around  the  couch 
and  were  so  absorbed  in  our  own  thoughts  of  death 
among  these  people  that  we  did  not  hear  anyone 
enter.  We  were  aroused  from  our  reverie  by  a  voice 
saying,  "Good  morning."  We  turned  toward  the 
door  and  there  stood  Emii  We  all  started,  and  then 
stood  as  though  dumb.  We  had  supposed  that  he  was 
a  thousand  miles  away,  and  his  sudden  appearance 
had  startled  us.  Before  we  had  time  to  compose  our- 
selves, he  had  walked  over  and  was  shaking  hands 
all  around. 

In  a  moment,  Emil  walked  to  the  couch  on  which 
the  old  man  was  lying.  Placing  his  hand  upon  the 
old  man's  head,  he  said,  "Here  we  have  a  dear 
brother  who  has  departed  from  this  earth  but  has 
not  been  able  to  finish  his  work  among  us.  As  one 
of  your  poets  has  said,  *He  has  wrapped  his  mantle 
about  him  and  has  lain  down  to  pleasant  dreams/ 
In  other  words,  you  have  pronounced  him  dead. 
Your  first  thought  is  to  get  an  undertaker  and  a 
coffin,  to  prepare  a  grave  to  hide  the  mortal  part 
of  him  while  it  dissolves. 


34 


TEACHING  OF  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

"Dear  friradss  kindly  think  for  a  moment.  To 
whom  did  Jesus  speak  when  he  said,  'Father,  I  thank 
Thee  that  Thou  hast  heard  me.5  He  was  not  talking 
to  the  outer  self,  the  me,  the  shell.  He  was  recogniz- 
ing and  praising  the  Inner  Self,  the  One  Infinite, 
the  All  Hearing,  All  Knowing,  All  Seeing*  the  Great 
and  Mighty  Omnipresent  God.  Can  you  not  see 
where  the  eyes  of  Jesus  were  turned  as  he  stood  at 
the  tomb  of  Lazarus?  Did  he,  like  you,  look  into 
that  tomb  and  see  a  dead  and  dissolving  Lazarus? 
While  your  vision  was  upon  the  dead,  he  held  his 
vision  upon  the  living,  the  only  begotten  of  God.  His 
vision  was  fixed  upon  unchangeable,  eternal,  omni- 
present Life,  and  that  Life  transcends  all.  Now  with 
our  vision  held  steadfastly  toward  the  ever-present 
reality  of  God,  we  can  behold  His  finished  work. 

"Here  is  a  dear  brother  who  never  relied  wholly 
on  God,  but  went  on  partially  in  his  own  strength, 
until  he  has  reached  this  stage  and  given  up  and 
made  the  mistake  which  so  many  are  making  today, 
the  mistake  you  look  upon  as  death.  This  dear  soul 
has  not  been  able  to  let  go  of  all  doubt  and  fear,  and 
thus  he  has  relied  on  his  own  strength  and  has  not 
been,  able  to  finish  the  work  set  before  all  Should 
we  leave  him  thus,  his  body  will  dissolve  and  he  will 
be  again  sent  forth  to  finish  his  mortal  task,  which 
is  all  but  complete.  In  fact,  so  nearly  complete  is  it 
that  we  can  help  him  to  finish,  and  we  feel  this  to  be 
a  great  privilege. 

"You  asked  if  he  can  again  be  awakened  to  full 
consciousness.  Yes,  he  can  and  so  can  all  others 
who  have  similarly  passed.  Though  he  has  passed, 
as  you  look  upon  it,  we  who  have  shared  a  part  of 
his  life  with  him  can  help  him  and  he  will  be  able 
to  understand  quickly  so  that  he  may  take  his  body 

35 


THE  LIFE  OF  THE   MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

with  him.  It  Is  not  necessary  to  leave  the  body  to 
so-called  death  and  dissolution  even  after  one  has 
apparently  made  the  great  mistake." 

Here  the  speaker  stopped,  and  for  a  moment 
appeared  to  be  lost  in  deep  meditation.  In  a  very 
short  time  four  of  our  friends  from  the  village  walked 
into  the  room.  They  gathered  close  together  for  a 
few  moments  as  though  in  deep  thought ;  then  two 
of  them  reached  out  their  hands  and  motioned  us  to 
join  them.  We  stepped  up  close  and  two  placed  their 
arms  around  two  of  our  party  and  we  in  turn  placed 
our  arms  around  each  other  until  the  circle  was 
complete.  The  circle  extended  around  the  couch  that 
the  form  of  the  departed  was  lying  upon.  As  we  stood 
there  for  a  moment  without  a  word  being  spoken, 
the  light  in  the  room  became  brighter.  We  turned 
and  Jesus  and  Pilate  were  standing  in  the  room  to- 
gether, a  few  steps  away.  They  came  forward  and 
joined  us. 

There  was  another  deep  silence ;  then  Jesus  step- 
ped forward  to  the  couch,  and  raising  both  hands, 
said,  "Dear  ones,  will  you  just  step  through  the  vale 
of  death  with  me  for  a  moment?  It  is  not  forbidden 
ground  as  you  think.  If  you  will  just  step  through 
as  we  have  done,  and  view  it  from  the  other  side,  you 
will  see  that  it  is  only  what  your  thoughts  have  made 
it.  There  is  life  there,  the  same  life  that  is  here."  He 
stood  for  a  moment  with  outstretched  hands.  "Dear 
friend  and  brother,  you  are  with  us  and  we  are  with 
you,  and  we  are  all  together  with  God.  The  sublime 
purity,  peace,  and  harmony  of  God  surrounds,  em- 
braces, and  enriches  all.  This  perfection  now  mani- 
fests so  vividly  to  you,  our  dear  one,  that  you  may 
arise  and  be  received  unto  your  Father.  Dear  one, 
you  see  and  know  that  it  is  not  dust  to  dust  and 

36 


TEACHING  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE   FAR  EAST 

ashes  to  ashes,  but  It  is  Life,  pure  Life,  Life  Ever- 
lasting. Your  body  need  not  be  left  to  mortal  dissolu- 
tion. You  now  perceive  the  glory  of  the  Kingdom 
fronn  which  you  come  forth.  You  may  now  arise  and 
go  to  your  Father,  and  the  shout  goes  up,  'All  hail, 
all  hail,  the  new  born  one,  the  risen  Lord,  the  Christ 
among  men.'  " 

Dear  reader,  words  are  but  a  travesty  when  the 
mortal  attempts  to  picture  the  beauty  and  purity  of 
the  light  that  filled  that  room,  and  as  that  form  arose, 
the  light  seemed  to  penetrate  every  object  so  that 
nothing  cast  a  shadow,  not  even  the  form  of  our 
friend  or  our  own  bodies.  The  walls  seemed  to  ex- 
pand and  become  transparent,  until  we  seemed  to 
be  looking  into  infinite  space.  The  glory  of  that  pic- 
ture cannot  be  told.  Then  we  knew  that  instead  of 
standing  in  the  presence  of  death,  we  were  standing 
in  the  presence  of  Eternal  Life,  Life  unspeakably 
grand,  never  diminishing  but  going  on  and  on, 
eternally. 

What  could  we  mortals  do  but  stand  and  stare? 
In  the  uplift  of  those  few  moments  we  were  car- 
ried, for  a  time,  far  beyond  our  most  sanguine  im- 
agination of  heaven  and  the  beauty  of  it  all.  It  was 
not  a  dream,  but  real.  Thus  the  real  can  be  greater 
than  any  dream.  We  were  privileged  to  see  through 
and  beyond  the  shadow. 

The  beauty  and  tranquility  of  that  scene,  and 
the  great  faith  we  had  already  placed  in  our  friends 
carried  us  completely  over  the  divide  that  day,  and 
today  that  divide  is  but  a  level  plain.  Yet  in  some 
way  it  was  made  clear  that  each  one,  for  himself, 
most  first  scale  the  heights  before  the  beauty  beyond 
can  be  seen. 

With  every  vestige  of  age  gone,  our  friend,  whom 

37 


THE  LSFS  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

we  looked  upon  as  raised  from  the  dead,  turned 
toward  Ms  associates  and  in  a  moment  began  to 
speak.  These  are  Ms  words,  as  he  stood  facing  our 
friends.  It  is  as  though  thcfy  were  cast  in  raised  gold 
upon  a  tablet  which  stands  always  before  me.  The 
voice  came  forth  with  a  majesty  that  I  cannot  ex- 
press. There  was  no  affectation,  just  a  clear,  deep 
note  of  sincerity  and  strength. 

He  said,  "Dear  ones,  you  cannot  know  the  joy^ 
the  peace,  the  great  bliss  you  have  given  me  in  awak- 
ening me  as  you  have.  Just  a  moment  ago  it  was  all 
dark;  I  stood,  fearing  to  go  on  and  yet  I  could  not 
return.  The  only  way  that  I  can  explain  it  is  I  seemed 
engulfed  in  a  great  blackness  from  which  I  suddenly 
seemed  to  awaken,  and  now  I  am  again  with  you." 
Here  his  face  became  so  radiant  with  joy  that  there 
was  no  mistaking  his  sincerity. 

Then  he  turned  to  us  and  said,,  "Dear  ones,  how 
I  love  to  think  of  our  association.  You  can  never 
know  the  joy  it  has  given  me  to  have  clasped  your 
hands;  the  great  joy  it  has  given  me  to  see  and 
know  and  feel  the  sincerity  with  which  you  have 
accepted  these,  my  dear  helpers,  who  at  this  moment 
I  am  able  to  call  divine.  Could  you  see  through  my 
eyes  at  this  moment,  you  would  be  able  to  know  the 
bliss  that  I  am  experiencing.  The  greatest  joy  of  all 
is  to  know  so  fully  that  each  of  you  will  stand  and 
know,  just  as  I  am  standing  and  knowing.  That  joy 
you  will  know  only  when  you  stand  as  I  stand.  I  can 
say  that  it  is  well  to  have  lived  a  full  life,  to  be  able 
to  enjoy  one  moment  of  this.  Then  to  think  that  I  can 
see  all  eternity  unfolding.  Do  you  wonder  when  1 
say  that  my  eyes  are  almost  blinded  and  I  am  dazed 
with  the  revelation?  Do  you  wonder  at  my  great 
longing  to  unfold  this  vision  to  you,  and  not  only 

38 


TEACHING  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

to  you,  but  to  every  brother  and  sister  In  the  whole 
wide  universe  of  God?  Dear  brothers,  if  I  could  lay 
a  transforming  hand  upon  you  and  lift  you  to  where 
I  stand,  it  seems  that  my  joy  would  be  multiplied 
manyfold  at  this  moment.  I  am  .shown  I  must  not  do 
that.  I  am  shown  that  you,  yourselves,  must  stretch 
forth  this  transforming  hand,  and  when  you  have 
stretched  it  forth  you  will  find  God's  hand  ready  to 
clasp  yours.  You  will  be  able  to  walk  and  talk  with 
Him,  and  God  will  eternally  bless  you  as  He  does  all. 
The  greatest  joy  of  all  is,  I  am  shown  that  it  does 
not  matter  what  the  caste  or  creed  or  church,  all  are 
welcome/1 

In  a  moment  he  had  disappeared  from  our  view, 
Just  faded  away,  it  seemed  to  us.  Was  this  an  ethereal 
vision?  All  my  associates  concluded  that  it  was  not, 
for  two  of  them  had  clasped  this  man's  hand.  I  leave 
it  to  the  reader  to  decide. 

Then  one  of  our  friends  from  the  village  turned 
to  us  and  said,  "I  know  that  you  are  doubting,  but 
won't  you  understand  that  this  was  not  staged  for 
your  benefit?  This  is  but  one  of  the  emergencies  in 
our  lives,  and  when  the  emergency  does  arise  we  are 
able  to  come  up  over  the  emergency.  This  dear  one 
had  not  been  able  in  his  own  strength  to  quite  sur- 
mount the  divide,  as  you  call  it.  In  fact  as  you  see  it, 
be  had  passed  on.  The  soul  had  left  the  body  behind, 
and  one  so  enlightened  can  be  helped  at  the  crucial 
moment,  so  that  the  soul  returns  and  the  body  fin- 
ishes its  perfection;  then  the  body  can  be  taken 
sdong.  This  brother  longed  too  ardently  to  pass  on, 
and  he  left  his  body,,  when  just  a  few  more  steps^  as 
t  were,  helped  it  over  the  divide  and  the  perfection 
Aras  complete.  The  help  extended  was  our  great 
privilege." 

39 


THE  LIFE  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

We  slowly  withdrew  our  arms  and  stood  for  a  full 
minute  in  absolute  silence.  One  of  our  party  broke 
the  silence  with  the  words,  "My  Lord  and  my  God." 
As  for  me  it  did  not  seem  as  though  I  should  ever 
want  to  talk  again.  I  wanted  to  think. 

We  were  all  seated  and  a  few  had  found  their 
voices  and  were  conversing  in  low  tones.  This  condi- 
tion had  lasted  for  fifteen  or  twenty  minutes  and 
nearly  everyone  was  engaged  in  general  conversation, 
when  one  of  our  party  walked  to  the  window.  He 
turned  and  said  there  seemed  to  be  strangers  arriving 
in  the  village.  We  all  went  down  to  meet  them,  as  it 
was  a  very  rare  occurrence  for  strangers  to  visit  the 
village  at  this  season  of  the  year  and  on  foot,  as  it 
was  just  past  midwinter. 

When  we  arrived,  we  found  that  it  was  a  party 
from  a  smaller  village  about  thirty  miles  down  the 
valley.  They  had  brought  a  man  who  had  lost  his 
way  in  a  storm  three  days  previous  and  had  been 
nearly  frozen.  His  friends  had  carried  him  on  a 
stretcher  all  that  distance  through  the  snow.  Jesus 
stepped  close  and,  placing  his  hand  upon  the  man's 
head,  stood  for  a  moment.  Almost  instantly  the  man 
threw  off  the  wrappings  and  rose  to  his  feet.  His 
friends,  when  they  saw  him  stand,  stared  at  him  for 
an  instant,  then  ran  from  the  scene  in  terror.  We 
could  not  persuade  them  to  return.  The  man  who 
was  healed  seemed  dazed  and  uncertain.  Two  of  our 
friends  persuaded  him  to  go  with  them  to  their 
homes,  while  our  party,  accompanied  by  Jesus,  -re- 
turned to  our  quarters. 


40 


IV 

AFTER  we  were  comfortably  seated,  Jesus 
proceeded  with  the  conversation. 
"When  we  stand  one  with  the  sum  of  all 
Intelligence,  and  recognize  ourselves  as  an  actual 
part  of  that  Intelligence,  and  know  conclusively  that 
this  is  Great  Principle,  God,  we  shall  soon  find  our- 
selves conscious  of  the  fact  that  all  intelligence 
throughout  the  whole  cosmic  Universe  is  working 
with  us.  We  also  realize  quickly  that  the  intelligence 
of  all  great  genius  as  well  as  the  little  mentality  of 
the  single  cell  of  the  body  is  working  with  us  in  per- 
fect harmony  and  accord.  This  is  the  One  Great 
Intelligent  Cosmic  Mind  that  we  are  positively  allied 
with.  Indeed,  we  are  that  very  Mind;  we  are  the 
self-consciousness  of  the  Universe.  The  instant  we 
feel  this  very  thing,  nothing  can  keep  us  from  the 
Godhead. 

"From  this  Universal  Consciousness,  we  can  draw 
all  knowledge ;  we  know  that  we  can  know  all,  with- 
out studying  and  without  process  of  reasoning,  not 
going  from  one  lesson  to  another  nor  from  one  point 
to  another.  The  lessons  are  necessary  only  in  order 
to  bring  us  to  the  attitude  in  which  we  can  step 
forth  into  this  thought.  Then  we  become  compre- 
hensive and  include  all  thought.  There  is  a  complete 
stream  of  motivating  thought  that  is  irresistible  and 
we  know  that  nothing  can  divert  us  from  true  ac- 
complishment. We  are  with  the  whole ;  thus  we  move 
on  irresistibly  with  the  whole.  It  is  impossible  for 
any  condition  to  keep  us  from  our  accomplishment. 
The  drop  of  water  is  only  weak  when  it  is  removed 
from  the  ocean;  replace  it  and  it  is  as  powerful  as 

4* 


THE  LIFE  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

the  whole  ocean.  It  matters  not  whether  we  like  It  or 
whether  we  believe  it.  It  is  Intelligent  Law  and  we 
are  that  very  thing. 

"The  sum  of  all  Truth  is  the  Great  Principle, 
God.  Everything  from  Eternity  to  Eternity,  whether 
we  think  it  is  a  great  truth  or  a  little  truth ;  every 
true  word,  thought  or  spoken ;  is  a  part  of  The  Great 
Truth,  One  Great  All,  One  Universal  Truth,  and 
we  are  that  very  thing.  When  we  realize  this  oneness 
and  stand  absolutely  with  Truth,  we  have  the  whole 
of  Truth  back  of  us  and  our  Irresistibility  is  increased. 
It  is  the  force  of  the  ocean  back  of  the  wave  that 
gives  the  wave  its  power ;  that,  too,  is  but  a  portion 
of  God-force  which  man  also  is. 

"The  sum  of  all  Love  is  the  Great  Principle,  God. 
It  is  the  sum  of  every  affection,  every  fervent  emo- 
tion, every  loving  thought,  look,  word,  or  deed.  Every 
attracted  love,  great  or  small,  sublime  or  low,  makes 
the  one  infinite  love  stand  forth,  and  nothing  is  too 
great  for  us.  As  we  love  unselfishly,  we  have  the  com- 
plete ocean  of  Cosmic  Love  with  us.  That  which  is 
thought  least  is  greatest,  as  it  sweeps  on  to  absolute 
perfection ;  thus  the  whole  Universe  of  Love  is  con- 
sciously with  us.  There  is  no  greater  power  on  earth 
or  in  heaven  than  pure  love.  Earth  becomes  heaven ; 
heaven  is  Humanity's  true  home. 

"Finally  the  sum  of  every  condition,  every  form, 
every  being  is  the  One  Infinite  Cosmic  Principle, 
God,  whether  it  be  individuals,  worlds,  planets,  stars, 
atoms,  electrons,  or  the  most  minute  particles.  All 
together  make  One  Infinite  Whole,  the  body  of 
which  is  the  Universe,  the  Mind,  Cosmic  Intelli- 
gence ;  the  soul,  Cosmic  Love.  Woven  together  as  a 
whole,  their  bodies,  minds,  and  souls  are  held  to- 
gether with  the  cohesive  force  of  love ;  yet  each  one 

4* 


TEACHING  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

functions  In  eternal  individual  identity,  moving  freely 
In  its  individual  orbit  and  octave  of  harmony,  at- 
tracted, drawn,  and  held  together  by  the  love  of  that 
universe  of  harmony.  We  constitute  that  Great  Being 
that  nothing  can  thwart.  It  is  made  up  of  every  unit 
of  humanity  as  well  as  every  unit  of  the  Universe. 
If  a  portion  or  one  unit  excludes  itself  from  the 
whole,  it  makes  no  difference  to  Principle  Being,  but 
it  makes  a  vast  difference  to  the  unit.  The  ocean  is 
not  conscious  of  the  removal  of  the  drop  of  water, 
but  the  drop  is  very  conscious  of  the  ocean  when  it 
is  returned  or  reunited  with  it. 

"It  is  not  enough  for  us  to  say  that  we  are  close 
to  the  Great  Cosmic  Principle,  God.  We  must  know 
definitely  that  we  are  one  with,  in,  and  of,  and  amal- 
gamated entirely  with,  Principle;  and  that  we  can 
not  be  separated  or  apart  from  God,  Principle.  Thus 
we  work  with  the  principle  of  power  which  is  all 
power.  It  is  the  Law,  that  in  Principle  we  live,  move, 
and  have  our  being.  Thus,  when  we  wish  to  come  in 
contact  with  God,  we  do  not  think  of  something  away 
from  us  and  difficult  to  attain.  All  we  need  know  is 
that  God  is  within  as  well  as  all  about  us  and  that  we 
are  completely  included  in  God;  that  we  are  con- 
sciously within  the  presence  of  God,  and  are  present 
in  God,  and  in  command  with  full  power.  Thus  we 
need  not  pause,  we  need  not  ponder;  we  take  the 
path  directly  to  God  vthhin.  Here  the  Christ  stands 
steadfast  and  supreme,  and  with  God  we  endure 
forever. 

"Thus  we  arouse  our  dead  selves  into  the  realiza- 
tion of  the  life  within,  and  that  life  resurrects  us 
from  the  dead ;  we  return  to  life  immortal,  unchang- 
ing. We  are  convinced  of  life  and  of  our  right  to  live 
that  life  fully  and  perfectly.  The  Christ  within  stands 

43 


THE  LIFE  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

forth  and  says,  CI  come  that  you  may  have  complete 
life  and  live  that  life  more  abundantly/  This  must  be 
a  true  resurrection  in  our  consciousness — an  uplifting 
of  our  dead  senses  into  a  higher  vibration  of  life, 
truth,  and  love.  As  all  nature  is  awakening  about 
us,  let  us  arouse  ourselves  and  see  the  dawn  of  this 
approaching  day.  Thus,  we  get  up  and  out  of  our 
grave  clothes,  up  and  out  of  all  sense  of  limitation  in 
which  we  have  bound  our  bodies.  We  roll  the  stone 
of  materiality  completely  from  our  consciousness, 
that  heavy  weight  of  thought  that  has  separated  the 
life  within  from  the  life  without ;  and  which  has  held 
the  life  form  in  death  and  denied  it  life  because  we 
have  not  recognized  its  right  to  life.  Let  us  get  t  up 
and  out  of  death  —  that  is  what  the  resurrection 
means.  It  is  an  awakening  to  the  full  realization  of 
life  here  and  now — and  that  life  omnipresent,  omni- 
potent, omniscient.  Nowhere  absent,  nowhere  power- 
less, nowhere  unconscious;  but  everywhere  present, 
everywhere 'powerful,  everywhere  conscious,  in  full- 
ness, in  freedom,  in  gloriously  radiant  expressive,  ex- 
panding action.   When  our  hearts  flame  to   this 
thought  and  our  whole  being  glows  with  this  life 
within,  we  can  readily  extend  our  hand  and  say, 
'Lazarus,  come  forth !  Get  out  of  your  grave,  you  do 
not  belong  in  death !  Come  to  life !  Awake  from  your 
delusion !  Awake  now  and  here.'  Thus  we  are  awak- 
ened to  the  Master  consciousness,  and  we  shall  weep 
because  of  the  density  of  thought  of  those  that  watch 
the  awakening.  Thousands  of  years  of  this  awaken- 
ing have  been  presented  to  humanity;  yet  many 
sleep,  but  their  sleeping  does  not  justify  us  in  so  doing. 
It  is  because  of  what  we  do  that  humanity  is  awak- 
ened to  that  rightful  heritage. 

"As  we  awaken  to  our  rightful  heritage,  we  shall 

44 


TEACHING  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

awaken  to  the  beauty  and  purity  of  the  eternal  age- 
old  message,  that  our  bodies  are  eternally  beautiful, 
pure,  and  perfect.  They  are  always  beautiful,  pure, 
spiritual  bodies,  most  magnificent  and  divine,  the  true 
temple  of  God.  This  awakening  also  convinces  us 
that  our  bodies  have  never  descended  from  that  high 
estate.  We  see  that  it  was  only  a  human  concept 
wherein  we  thought  they  had  descended.  As  soon  as 
this  thought  is  released,  our  body  is  released  to  its 
true  inheritance  of  divinity.  Then  the  fragrance  of  a 
warm  summer  evening  suffuses  all  nature,  and  our 
bodies  begin  to  take  on  this  effulgence.  Soon  pure 
rays  of  white  light  appear  within  our  bodies ;  they 
become  aglow  with  this  light ;  and  this  soft,  yet  bril- 
liant, living  light  invades  the  clear  atmosphere 
around  us  like  a  white-gold  vapor.  This  light  in- 
creases steadily  until  it  covers  and  permeates  every- 
thing about  us.  Bathed  in  this  radiance,  there  appears 
a  pure  crystal  white  light,  dazzling  and  scintillating 
with  a  radiance  greater  than  that  of  the  purest  dia- 
mond, yet  it  is  emanating  from  our  bodies  and  they 
stand  forth  ablaze  with  pure  light,  radiant  and  beau- 
tiful Here  we  stand  together  on  the  Holy  Mount  of 
Transfiguration,  with  body  luminous  and  glowing, 
radiant  and  beautiful,  immersed  wholly  in  Divine 
Life.  The  Son  of  man  has  become  the  Christ  of  God 
and  the  Kingdom  of  God  is  once  more  among  man- 
kind and  more  vital  because  others  have  accepted 
and  brought  forth  the  Kingdom  in  full  dominion. 
The  light  of  the  God  Kingdom  grows  stronger  be- 
cause of  the  acceptance. 

"This  is  the  true  body  which  Humanity  has  al- 
ways had  and  which  all  have  today.  Such  a  body 
always  has  existed  and  always  will  exist.  It  is  a  body 
so  luminous  that  no  germ  of  old  age  or  decay  can  find 

45 


THE  LIFE  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

lodgement  therein.  It  Is  a  body  so  alive  that  it  can  not 
die.  Such  a  body  can  be  crucified  a  thousand  times, 
and  because  of  such  a  crucifixion,  come  forth  more 
triumphant.  Such  a  body  stands  forth  as  the  Divine 
Master  of  every  situation.  Such  a  body  is  eternally 
resurrected. 

'This  is  a  new-age  message  to  you,  the  same  as  it 
-seemed  to  be  a  new-age  message  two  thousand  years 
ago.  It  is  the  same  today  as  it  was  then ;  it  is  but  the 
resurrection  of  the  age-old  message.  This  message 
was  told  thousands  of  centuries  ago  in  language  so 
simple  that  babes  could  read.  The  message  is,  that 
man  of  his  own  free  will  shall  leave  the  man-made 
kingdom  and  evolve  to  the  God  Kingdom.  The  son 
of  man  is  to  realize  his  divinity,  reveal  this  divinity 
in  his  body  and  affairs,  and  become  the  Christ  of 
God  in  the  Kingdom  of  God.  'Know  ye  not  that  ye 
are  gods  ?s 

"Within  you,  know  that  this  Kingdom  of  God  is 
the  most  natural  thing  in  the  world.  You  have  but 
overlooked  the  fact  that  if  man  be  in  Christ  he  is  a 
new  creature.  It  is  the  Father's  good  pleasure  to 
give  you  the  kingdom,  and  every  man  passeth  into 
it.5  The  question  is  asked  'When?*  The  answer  always 
is,  "When  the  without  is  as  the  within.5 

"The  great  oak  tree  that  sleeps  within  the  acorn, 
became  aroused  throughout  the  whole  acorn,  before 
the  tree  could  develop.  'Eye  hath  not  seen,  nor  ear 
heard,  nor  hath  it  entered  into  the  heart  of  man  to 
conceive  of  the  things  that  God  hath  prepared  for 
them  that  love  him.9 

"God  knows  that  in  the  great  structure  of  the 
unverse  there  is  a  splendid  place  for  every  human 
being,  and  that  each  has  his  individual  place.  The 
structure  can  stand  only  because  each  is  in  his  right 


TEACHING  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

place.  Does  not  this  message  lighten  the  burden  of 
everyone,  and  adorn  each  countenance  with  a  smile, 
even  those  of  the  weary  ones  who  think  they  labor 
like  dumb,  driven  cattle?  Thus  I  say  to  you,  you  are 
an  especially  designed  creation,  you  have  a  particu- 
lar mission,  you  have  a  light  to  give,  a  work  to  do  that 
no  other  can  give  or  accomplish ;  and  if  you  will  open 
your  heart,  mind,  and  soul  wide  to  spirit,  you  will 
learn  of  it  in  your  own  heart.  There  you  find  that 
your  very  own  Father  speaks  to  you.  No  matter  how 
wayward  or  thoughtless  you  have  thought  yourself, 
you  will  find  that  your  Father  loves  you  devotedly 
and  tenderly  the  instant  you  turn  to  God  within.  The 
anointing  which  you  have  of  God  abides  in  you  and 
you  need  not  the  teaching  of  any  man.  Is  this  not  a 
resurrection  from  the  old  thought?  "Ye  need  not  that 
any  man  teach  you.5  It  is  only  necessary  to  receive 
the  anointing  from  God  that  has  always  been  yours. 
You  may  accept  others  as  brother  helpers,  but  you 
are  always  instructed  and  led  from  within ;  the  truth 
is  there  for  you  and  you  will  find  it. 

"That  truth  always  teaches  that  humanity  is  a 
complete  unit;  not  a  unity,  but  a  great  unit;  com- 
bined with  God  they  are  the  Great  One.  Humanity 
is  more  than  a  brotherhood.  It  is  One  Man,  just  as 
a  vine  and  its  branches  is  one  vine.  No  one  part  or 
one  unit  can  be  separated  from  the  whole.  The 
Christ's  prayer  is  That  they  all  may  be  One.' 

"  cHe  that  hath  done  it  unto  the  least  of  these 
my  brethren,  hath  done  it  unto  me.'  Now  you  know 
the  Christ  for  whom  the  whole  family  in  heaven  and 
on  earth  is  named. 

"The  Truth  is,  'All  is  One*;  One  Spirit,  One 
Body,  the  Great  Lord  Body  of  all  humanity.  The 

47 


THE  LIFE  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

Great  Love,  Light,  Life  of  God  completely  amal- 
gamates that  body  Into  One  Complete  Whole.** 


48. 


V 

AT  ONE  time,  conversation  led  on  to  a  point 
where  one  of  our  party  asked  where  hell  was 
and  what  the  devil  meant.  Jesus  turned 
quickly  and  said,  uHell  or  the  devil  has  no  abiding 
place  except  in  man's  mortal  thought.  Both  of  them 
are  just  wherever  man  places  them.  With  your  pres- 
ent' enlightenment,  can  you  place  either  in  any  geo- 
graphical position  on  the  earth?  If  heaven  is  all  and 
surrounds  all,  where  could  hell  or  the  devil  be  placed 
ethereally?  If  God  rules  all  and  is  All,  where  could 
either  be  placed  in  God's  perfect  plan? 

"If  we  take  the  science  of  things,  we  know  there 
is  a  legend  told  here  that  all  the  heat  and  light  and 
many  other  natural  forces  are  contained  right  within 
the  earth  itself.  The  sun,  of  itself,  has  no  heat  or  light. 
It  has  potentialities  that  draw  the  heat  and  light  from 
the  earth.  After  the  sun  has  drawn  the  heat  and  light 
rays  from  the  earth,  the  heat  rays  are  reflected  back 
to  the  earth  by  the  atmosphere  that  floats  in  the 
ether.  The  light  rays  are  drawn  from  the  earth  in 
about  the  same  manner  and  are  reflected  back  to 
the  earth  by  the  ether.  As  the  air  extends  only  a  com* 
paratively  short  distance,  the  effect  of  the  heat  rays 
varies  as  you  leave  the  earth's  surface  and  ascend 
toward  the  outer  limit  of  the  atmosphere.  As  the  air 
becomes  less  dense,  there  is  less  reflection;  conse- 
quently as  you  ascend  into  the  higher  altitudes  the 
heat  becomes  less  and  the  cold  increases.  Every  heat 
ray,  as  it  is  drawn  out  and  reflected,  drops  back  to 
the  earth,  where  it  is  regenerated.  When  you  have 
reached  the  limit  of  air,  you  have  reached  the  limit 
of  heat.  It  is  the  same  with  the  light  rays.  They  are 

49 


THE  LIFE  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

"drawn  from  the  earth  and  reflected  back  by  the 
ether.  As  this  ether  extends  much  farther  from  the 
earth  than  the  air,  the  light  rays  extend  much  farther 
before  they  are  all  reflected.  When  you  have  reached 
the  limit  of  ether,  you  have  reached  the  limit  of 
light.  When  you  have  reached  the  limit  of  heat  and 
light,  you  have  reached  the  great  cold.  This  cold  is 
far  more  solid  than  steel,  and  it  presses  down  upon 
the  ether  and  the  atmosphere  with  almost  irresistible 
force  and  holds  them  together.  Hell  is  supposed  to 
be  warm,  and  his  Satanic  Majesty  abhors  cold;  so 
you  could  not  find  any  lodging  place  out  there  for 
them. 

"Now  that  we  have  disposed  of  them  above,  let 
us  take  the  other  scientific  legend  and  go  below. 
According  to  this  legend,  the  earth  a  short  distance 
from  the  surface  is  a  molten  mass.  It  is  so  hot  that 
it  will  melt  any  substance.  This  molten  mass  at  the 
center  revolves  more  slowly  than  does  the  crust  at 
the  outer,  and  the  belt  where  the  two  meet  is  the 
place  where  the  natural  forces  are  generated,  and 
there,  again,  the  hand  of  God  rules  all.  So  there  is 
no  place  for  his  Satanic  Majesty  or  his  home  there ; 
for  if  he  attempted  to  live  in  either  the  hottest  or  the 
coldest  place,  he  would  find  it  very  uncomfortable, 
since  cold  will  consume  as  well  as  heat.  We  have 
searched  every  place  and  we  can  not  find  him  a 
home;  so  we  must  assume  that  he  is  right  where 
man  is,  and  has  all  the  power  that  man  gives  him. 

"It  was  only  the  personal  adversary  that  I  cast 
out.  Do  you  think  for  a  moment  that  I  would  cast 
the  devil  out  of  any  man,  and  then  allow  him  to 
enter  a  herd  of  swine  that  cast  themselves  into  the 
sea?  I  never  saw  the  devil  in  any  man,  save  he 
brought  him  there  himself.  The  only  dominion  I 

50 


TEACHING  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

ever  gave  Mm  was  that  which  man  himself  gave 
him:9 

Later  the  talk  led  to  God,  and  one  of  our  party 
said,  "I  would  like  to  know  who  or  what  God  really 
is.5*  Then  Jesus  spoke,  and  said,  "I  believe  that  I 
understand  the  motive  of  the  question  you  would 
like  to  clear  up  in  your  own  mind.  It  is  the  many 
conflicting  thoughts  and  ideas  that  are  puzzling  or. 
disturbing  the  world  today  without  reference  to  the 
origin  of  the  word.  God  is  the  principle  behind 
everything  that  exists  today.  The  principle  behind 
a  thing  is  Spirit;  and  Spirit  is  Omnipotent,  Omni- 
present, Omniscient.  God  is  the  one  Mind  that  is 
both  the  direct  and  the  directing  cause  of  all  the 
good  that  we  see  about  us.  God  is  the  source  of  all 
the  true  Love  that  holds  or  binds  all  forms  together. 
God  is  impersonal  principle.  God  is  never  personal 
except  as  He  becomes  to  each  individual  a  personal 
loving  Father-Mother.  To  the  individual  He  can  be 
a  personal,  loving,  all-giving  Father-Mother.  God 
never  becomes  a  great  being  located  somewhere  in 
the  skies  in  a  place  called  heaven,  where  He  has  a 
throne  which  He  sits  upon  and  judges  people  after 
they  die ;  for  God  is  the  Life  itself  and  that  life  never 
dies.  That  is  but  a  misconception  brought  about  by 
man's  ignorant  thinking,  just  as  so  many  malforma- 
tions have  been  brought  about  and  you  see  them  in 
the  world  around  you.  God  is  not  a  judge  or  a  king 
who  can  intrude  His  presence  upon  you,  or  bring  you 
before  the  bar  of  justice.  God  is  a  loving,  all-giving 
Father-Mother,  who,  when  you  approach,  puts  out 
His  arms  and  enfolds  you.  It  does  not  matter  who 
or  what  you  are,  or  what  you  have  been.  You  are 
His  child  just  the  same  when  you  seek  Him  with  a 
true  heart  and  purpose.  If  you  are  the  Prodigal  Son 

5* 


THE  LIFE  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

who  has  turned  'his  face  from  the  Father's  house  and 
you  arc  weary  of  the  husks  of  life  that  you  are  feed- 
ing to  the  swine,  you  can  again  turn  your  face  to 
the  Father's  house  and  be  certain  of  a  loving  wel- 
come. The  feast  ever  awaits  you  there.  The  table  is 
always  spread3  and  when  you  do  return,  there  will 
not  be  a  reproach  from  a  brother  that  has  returned 
before  you. 

"God's  love  is  like  a  pure  spring  that  gushes 
from  a  mountain.  At  its  source  it  is  pure ;  but  as  it 
flows  on  its  course  it  becomes  clouded  and  polluted. 
until  it  enters  the  ocean  so  impure  it  does  not  even 
resemble  that  which  emerged  from  the  source.  As  it 
enters  the  ocean  it  begins  to  drop  the  mud  and  slime 
to  the  bottom  and  again  rises  to  the  surface  as  a  part 
of  the  glad,  free  ocean,  from  which  it  again  can  be 
taken  up  to  refresh  the  spring. 

"You  can  see  and  talk  with  God  at  any  time,  just 
as  you  can  with  father,  mother,  brother,  or  friend. 
Indeed,  He  is  far  closer  than  any  mortal  can  be.  God 
is  far  dearer  and  truer  than  any  friend.  God  is  never 
wrought  up,  nor  angry,  nor  cast  down.  God  never 
destroys,  nor  hurts,  nor  hinders  one  of  His  children 
or  creatures  or  creations.  If  God  did  these  things,  He 
would  not  be  God.  The  god  that  judges,  destroys,  or 
withholds  any  good  thing  from  his  children  or  crea- 
tures or  creations  is  but  a  god  that  is  conjured  up  by 
man's  ignorant  thinking ;  and  you  need  not  fear  that 
god  unless  you  wish  to  do  so.  For  the  true  God 
stretches  forth  His  hand  and  says,  'All  that  I  have  is 
yours.*  When  one  of  your  poets  said  that  God  is  closer 
than  breathing  and  nearer  than  hands  or  feet,  he  was 
inspired  by  God.  All  are  inspired  by  God  when  that 
inspiration  is  for  the  good  or  the  right,  and  all  can  be 
inspired  by  God  at  all  times  if  they  only  will 

52 


TEACHING  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

"When  I  said,  SI  am  the  Christ,  the  only  begotten 
of  God5  I  did  not  declare  this  for  myself  alone,  for 
had  I  done  this  I  could  not  have  become  the  Christ. 
I  saw  definitely  that,  in  order  to  bring  forth  the 
Christ,  I,  as  well  as  all  others,  must  declare  it ;  then 
must  live  the  life,  and  the  Christ  must  appear.  You 
may  declare  the  Christ  all  you  will,  and  if  you  do 
not  live  the  life,  the  Christ  will  never  appear.  Just 
think,  dear  friends,  if  .all  would  declare  the  Christ, 
then  live  the  life  for  one  year  or  five  years,  what 
an  awakening  there  would  be.  The  possibilities  can- 
not be  imagined.  That  was  the  vision  that  I  saw. 
Dear  ones,  can  you  not  place  yourselves  where  I 
stood  and  see  as  I  saw?  Why  do  you  surround  me 
with  the  murk  and  mire  of  superstition!  Why  do 
you  not  lift  your  eyes  and  minds  and  thoughts  above 
these  and  see  with  a  clear  vision !  Then  you  would 
see  that  there  are  no  miracles,  no  mysteries,  no  pain, 
no  imperfection,  no  inharmony,  and  no  death,  except 
that  which  man  has  made.  When  I  said  CI  have  over- 
come death,*  I  knew  whereof  I  spoke;  but  it  took 
the  crucifixion  to  show  these  dear  ones. 

"There  are  a  great  many  of  us  joined  together 
to  help  the  whole  world,  and  this  is  our  lifework. 
There  have  been  times  when  it  has  taken  our  com- 
bined energies  to  ward  off  the  waves  of  evil  thoughts, 
of  doubt  and  disbelief  and  superstition,  that  have 
nearly  engulfed  mankind.  You  may  call  them  evil 
forces  if  you  wish.  We  know  that  they  are  evil  only 
as  man  makes  them  so.  But  now  we  see  the  light 
growing  brighter  and  brighter  as  the  dear  ones  throw 
off  the  bonds.  The  throwing  off  of  these  bonds  may 
for  a  time  sink  mankind  into  materiality;  but  even 
so,  it  is  a  step  nearer  the  goal,  for  materiality  does 
not  hold  one  as  superstition  and  myth  and  mystery 

53 


THE  LIFE  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

hold  one.  When  I  stepped  upon  the  water  that  day, 
do  you  think  that  I  cast  my  eyes  downward  Into  the 
great  depths,  the  material  substance?  No,  I  fastened 
my  eyes  steadfastly  on  God  Power  that  transcends 
any  power  of  the  deep.  The  moment  I  did  this  the 
water  became  as  firm  as  a  rock  and  I  could  walk 
upon  it  in  perfect  safety/9 

Jesus  stopped  talking  for  a  moment,  and  one  of 
our  party  asked,  "While  we  are  talking,  does  it  not 
hinder  you  from  going  right  on  with  your  work?" 

Jesus  answered  and  said,  "You  cannot  hinder  one 
of  our  friends  here  for  a  moment^  and  I  believe  I  am 
included  as  one  of  them/* 

Someone  spoke  and  said,  "You  are  our  Brother." 

Then  Jesus*  face  lighted  up  with  a  smile  as  he 
said,  "Thank  you,  I  have  always  named  you 
Brothers." 

One  of  the  party  then  turned  and  asked  Jesus, 
"Can  all  bring  forth  the  Christ?"  He  answered,  "Yes, 
there  is  but  one  end  of  accomplishment.  Man  came 
forth  from  God  and  he  must  return  to  God.  That 
which  from  the  heavens  descended  must  again  ascend 
unto  heaven.  The  history  of  the  Christ  did  not  begin 
with  my  birth;  neither  did  it  end  with  the  cruci- 
fixion. The  Christ  was  when  God  created  the  first 
man  in  His  own  image  and  likeness.  The  Christ  and 
that  man  are  one;  all  men  and  that  man  are  one. 
As  God  was  his  Father,  so  is  He  the  father  of  all 
men,  all  are  God's  children.  As  the  child  has  the 
quality  of  the  parent,  so  the  Christ  is  in  every  child. 
For  many  years  the  child  lived  and  realized  his 
Christhood,  his  oneness  with  God,  through  the  Christ 
in  himself.  Then  began  the  history  of  the  Christ  and 
you  can  trace  this  history  back  to  man's  beginning. 
That  the  Christ  means  more  than  the  man  Jesus, 

54 


TEACHING  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

goes  without  contradiction.  Had  I  not  perceived  this, 
I  could  not  have  brought  forth  the  Christ.  To  me 
this  is  the  pearl  without  price,  the  old  wine  In  new 
bottles,  the  truth  which  many  others  have  brought 
forth,  and  thus  have  fulfilled  the  ideals  that  I  have 
fulfilled  and  proved. 

"For  more  than  fifty  years  after  that  day  on  the 
cross,  I  taught  and  lived  with  my  disciples  and  many 
of  those  I  loved  dearly.  In  those  days  we  gathered  at 
a  quiet  place  outside  Judea.  There  we  were  free  from 
the  prying  eyes  of  superstition.  There  many  acquired 
the  great  gifts  and  they  accomplished  a  great  work. 
Then,  seeing  that,  by  withdrawing  for  a  time,  I 
would  be  able  to  reach  and  help  all,  I  withdrew. 
Besides,  they  were  depending  upon  me  instead  of 
upon  themselves;  and  In  order  to  make  then  self- 
reliant,  It  was  necessary  for  me  to  withdraw  from 
them.  If  they  had  lived  In  close  association  with  me, 
then  could  they  not  find  me  again  If  they  desired  to 
do  so? 

"The  cross  was,  in  the  beginning,  the  symbol  of 
the  greatest  joy  the  world  ever  knew.  The  foundation 
of  the  cross  Is  the  place  where  man  first  trod  the 
earth,  therefore  the  mark  that  symbolizes  the  dawn 
of  a  celestial  day  here  on  earth.  If  you  will  trace  It 
back,  you  will  find  that  the  cross  disappears  entirely 
and  that  it  is  the  man  standing  In  the  attitude  of 
devotion,  standing  In  space  with  arms  upraised  In 
blessing,  sending  out  his  gifts  to  humanity,  pouring 
all  his  gifts  forth  freely  In  every  direction. 

"When  you  know  that  the  Christ  is  the  fitting 
life  within  the  form,  the  rising  energy  that  the  scien- 
tist glimpses,  yet  does  not  know  whence  it  came; 
when  you  feel  with  the  Christ  that  the  life  is  lived 
so  that  life  may  be  given  freely;  when  you  learn  that 

55 


THE  LIFE  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

man  is  obliged  to  live  by  the  constant  dissolution  of 
forms,  and  that  the  Christ  lived  to  give  up  the  thing 
that  the  body  of  sense  craved,  for  the  good  that  he 
could  not  at  the  moment  enjoy — you  are  the  Christ. 
When  you  see  yourself  a  part  of  the  greater  life,  but 
willing  to  sacrifice  yourself  for  the  good  of  the  whole ; 
when  you  learn  to  do  right  without  being  affected  by 
the  outcome  to  self;  when  you  learn  freely  to  give 
up  the  physical  life  and  all  that  the  world  has  to  give 
(this  is  not  self-abnegation  or  poverty  9  for  as  you  give 
of  God  you  will  find  you  have  the  more  to  give, 
although  at  times  duty  may  seem  to  demand  all 
that  life  has  to  give.  You  will  also  know  that  he  who 
will  save  his  life  shall  lose  it)  then  you  will  see  that 
the  pure  gold  is  at  the  deepest  part  of  the  furnace, 
where  the  fire  has  fully  cleansed  it.  You  will  find 
great  joy  in  knowing  that  the  life  you  have  given  to 
others  is  the  life  you  have  won.'  You  will  know  that  to 
receive  is  to  give  freely;  that  if  you  lay  down  the 
mortal  form,  a  higher  life  will  prevail.  You  have  the 
glad  assurance  that  a  life  thus  won  is  won  for  all. 

"Yon  must  know  that  the  Great  Christ  Soul  can 
go  down  to  the  river  and  that  the  stepping  into  the 
water  but  typifies  the  sympathy  you  feel  for  the 
world's  great  need.  Then  you  are  able  to  help  your 
fellow-men  and  not  boast  of  virtue;  you  can  pass 
out  the  bread  of  life  for  the  hungry  souls  that  come 
to  you,  yet  that  bread  never  diminishes  by  the  giv- 
ing ;  you  must  press  on  and  know  fully  that  you  are 
able  to  heal  all  that  come  to  you,  sick  or  weary  or 
heavy  laden,  with  the  Word  that  makes  whole  the 
soul ;  you  are  able  to  open  the  eyes  of  those  blinded 
either  from  ignorance  or  from  choice.  (It  does  not 
matter  how  low  the  blinded  soul  may  be,  he  must 
feel  that  the  Christ  soul  stands  beside  him  and  he 

56 


TEACHING  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

must  find  that  you  tread  with  human  feet  the  very 
ground  he  treads) .  Then  you  wll  know  that  the  true 
Unity  of  Father  and  Son  is  within  and  not  without. 
You  will  know  that  you  must  stand  serene  when  the 
God  without  is  put  away  and  only  the  God  within 
remains.  You  must  be  able  to  withhold  the  cry  of 
love  and  fear  as  the  words,  4My  God*  my  God,  why 
have  you  forsaken  me?1  ring  out.  Still  at  that  hour 
you  must  not  feel  alone,  for  you  must  know  that  you 
stand  with  God;  that  you  are  nearer  to  the  heart 
of  the  loving  Father  than  you  have  ever  been  before. 
You  must  know  that  the  hour  you  touch  the  deepest 
sorrow  is  the  hour  in  which  your  greatest  triumph 
begins.  With  all  this  you  must  know  that  sorrows 
can  not  touch  you. 

"From  that  hour  your  voice  will  ring  with  a 
great,  free  song,  for  you  fully  know  that  you  are  the 
Christ,  this  light  which  is  to  shine  among  men  and 
for  men.  Then  you  will  know  the  darkness  that  is  in 
every  soul  that  cannot  find  a  helping  hand  to  clasp 
as  he  journeys  on  the  rugged  road  before  he  finds 
the  Christ  within. 

"You  must  know  that  you  are  truly  divine ;  and 
being  divine,  you  must  see  that  all  men  are  as  you 
are.  You  will  know  that  there  are  dark  places  you 
must  pass  with  the  light  that  you  are  to  carry  to  the 
highest,  and  your  soul  will  ring  out  in  praise  that  you 
can  be  of  service  to  all  men.  Then  with  a  glad  free 
shout  you  mount  to  your  very  highest  in  your  union 
with  God. 

"Now  you  know  that  there  is  no  substitution  of 
your  life  for  other  lives  or  of  your  purity  for  others* 
sins ;  but  that  all  are  glad,  free  spirits  in  and  of  them- 
selves and  of  God.  You  know  that  you  can  reach 
them  while  they  cannot  reach  each  other;  that  you 

57 


THE  LIFE  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

cannot  help  giving  of  your  life  for  the  life  of  each 
soul,  that  It  shall  not  perish.  Yet  you  must  be  so  rev- 
erent of  that  soul  that  you  will  not  pour  into  it  a 
flood  of  life  unless  the  life  of  that  soul  opens  to  receive 
it.  But  you  will  freely  pour  out  to  it  a  flood  of  love, 
life  and  light,  so  that  when  that  one  does  open  the 
windows  the  light  of  God  will  pour  in  and  illuminate 
him.  You  will  know  that  in  every  Christ  that  arises, 
humanity  is  lifted  one  step  higher.  Then,  too,  you 
must  know  full  well  that  you  have  everything  that 
the  Father  has ;  and  having  all,  it  is  for  all  to  use. 
You  must  know  that  as  you  rise  and  are  true,  you 
lift  the  whole  world  with  you ;  for  as  you  tread  the 
path  it  becomes  plainer  for  your  fellow-men.  You 
must  have  faith  in  yourself,  knowing  fully  that  that 
faith  is  God  within.  Finally  you  must  know  that  you 
are  a  temple  of  God,  a  house  not  made  with  hands, 
immortal  in  the  earth,  and  in  heaven  as  well. 

"Then  will  they  sing  of  you,  'All  Hail,  All  Hail, 
He  comes,  He  comes,  the  King;  and  lo,  He  is  with 
you  always.  You  are  in  God  and  He  is  in  you.3  ** 

Jesus  arose,  saying  he  would  be  obliged  to  leave 
us,  as  he  was  to  be  at  the  home  of  another  Brother 
in  the  same  village  that  evening.  The  whole  com- 
pany arose.  Jesus  blessed  all,  and  with  two  of  the 
gathering,  walked  from  the  room. 


CHAPTER  VI 

AFTER  we  were  again  seated,  one  of  our  party 
turned  to  Emil  and  asked  If  all  could  acquire 
the  art  of  healing.  He  said,  "The  power  to 
heal  can  be  obtained  only  as  we  leam  to  trace  things 
out  from  their  source.  Supremacy  over  every  discord 
can  come  only  in  the  degree  that  we  understand  that 
they  do  not  come  from  God. 

"The  divinity  that  shapes  your  destinies  is  not  a 
mighty  person  molding  you  as  a  potter  molds  his 
clay,  but  a  Mighty  Divine  Power — within  and  all 
around  you,  and  around  and  in  all  substance — which 
is  yours  to  use  as  you  will.  If  you  do  not  realize  this, 
you  cannot  have  confidence  in  yourselves.  The  great- 
est cure  for  inharmony  is  the  knowledge  that  it  is  not 
from  God,  and  that  God  never  did  create  it. 

"The  brain  has  the  quality  of  receiving  and 
recording  the  vibrations  of  any  object  that  the  eye 
conveys  to  it.  The  vibrations  of  the  lights  and  shades 
and  colors  are  all  recorded.  It  also  has  the  quality 
of  reproducing  these  vibrations  and  projecting  them 
out  again,  this  time  through  the  inner  vision;  then 
we  again  see  the  picture  the  eye  has  conveyed.  You 
are  reproducing  this  in  your  camera  every  time  you 
expose  a  sensitized  plate.  That  plates  receives  and 
records  the  vibrations  that  the  object  you  wish  to 
photograph,  sends  out.  After  the  vibrations  are  re- 
ceived and  recorded  on  the  plate,  you  must  fix  the 
result  on  the  plate,  if  they  are  to  become  permanent, 
so  that  you  can  see  them.  It  will  be  only  a  short  time 
before  you  will  find  that  the  movements  and  colors 
of  the  objects  that  you  photograph  can  be  recorded 
and  projected  by  first  fixing,  and  then  returning  or 

59 


THE  LIFE  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

projecting,  the  lights  and  colors  at  the  same  rate  of 
vibration  at  which  they  were  received  and  fixed, 

"It  is  the  same  with  thought  and  word  and  act. 
Each  selective  set  of  brain  cells  takes  up  and  records 
Its  corresponding  set  of  vibrations ;  and  when  these 
vibrations  are  repeated  and  projected,  they  can  be 
reproduced  "just  as  they  took  place,  if  the  cells  are 
held  directly  to  their  duty. 

"There  Is  also  another  set  of  selective  brain  cells 
that  can  receive,  record  and  fix  the  vibrations  of  the 
thoughts,  acts,  motions,  and  pictures  ^  that  other 
bodies  or  forms  send  out.  These  vibrations  can  be 
again  reproduced  and  projected,  and  you  can  so 
arrange  these  cells  that  you  can  reproduce  the  words 
and  motions  of  these  bodies  or  objects  and  even  the 
thoughts  of  those  that  send  them  out.  Through  these 
cells  you  can  assist  others  as  well  as  yourself  to  con- 
trol their  thoughts.  It  is  through  these  cells  that  acci- 
dents and  calamities  are  brought  about,  such  as  wars, 
earthquakes,  floods,  fires  and  all  the  trouble  that 
mortal  man  is  heir  to.  Someone  either  sees  a  thing 
happen  or  images  it  as  happening  ;  the  correspond- 
ing vibration  is  fixed  in  the  cells,  sent  out  to  be  im- 
pressed on  the  corresponding  cells  of  other  brains, 
then  again  projected  back,  until  the  thing  is  so  fixed 
that  it  happens. 

"All  these  things  can  be  avoided  if  the  thought 
that  sustains  them  is  immediately  withdrawn  and 
the  vibrations  are  not  allowed  to  be  fixed  upon  those 
brain  cells,  so  that  those  particular  vibrations  cannot 
be  again  projected.  It  is  through  this  set  of  cells  that 
all  calamities  are  foretold. 

"There  is  still  another  set  of  selective  brain  cells 
that  receive,  record,  and  fix  the  vibrations  of  the 
thoughts  and  activities  of  Divine  Mind,  wherein  all 

60 


TEACHING  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

the  tree  vibrations  are  created  and  sent  out.  This 
Divine  Mind,  or  God,  pervades  every  substance  and 
is  always  sending  out  divine  and  true  vibrations ;  and 
if  we  hold  these  cells  to  their  true  office,  we  are  able 
to  receive  and  send  out  the  same  true  and  divine 
vibrations  that  we  receive  from  Divine  Mind.  We 
do  not  have  the  Divine  Mind,  but  we  have  the  cells 
that  receive  and  project  the  vibrations  of  the  Divine 
Mind." 

There  was  a  pause  and  deep  silence,  then  a  pic- 
ture appeared  upon  the  wall  of  the  room.  It  was  still 
at  first,  but  in  a  moment  it  became  animated  and 
after  the  lapse  of  another  moment,  the  scene  began 
to  change.  Scenes  that  could  represent  those  enacted 
in  any  or  all  of  the  more  prosperous  business  centers 
of  the  world  came  flooding  in.  While  they  were 
changing  very  rapidly,  there  was  sufficient  time  for 
us  to  recognize  and  name  many  familiar  places ;  and 
one  in  particular,  a  reproduction  of  the  scenes 
enacted  when  we  landed  in  Calcutta  in  December, 
1894.  This  was  long  before  we  had  ever  heard  of 
the  cinema  or  motion  picture.  Yet  these  pictures 
depicted  and  brought  out  all  the  movements  of  the 
human  form  and  other  objects.  These  pictures  con- 
tinued to  pour  in  at  intervals  of  about  one  minute's 
duration,  for  nearly  an  hour. 

While  these  pictures  were  passing,  Emil  said, 
"These  pictures  represent  the  conditions  that  exist 
in  the  world  today.  You  will  note  the  air  of  general 
peace  and  prosperity  that  prevails  over  a  greater 
portion  of  the  earth.  There  is  a  reasonable  amount 
of  contentment;  the  people  seem  undisturbed  and 
generally  happy.  But  underneath,  there  is  a  seething 
caldron  of  discord,  generated  by  man's  own  ignorant 
thinking.  There  is  hate,  intrigue,  and  discord  among 

61 


THE  LIFE  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

nations.  Men  are  beginning  to  visualize  great  military 
establishments,  the  like  of  which  were  never  before 
known  on  earth.  While  we  are  doing  everything  in 
our  power  to  bring  out  the  good?  our  combined 
efforts  will  not  be  sufficient  to  sway  those  who  are 
determined  to  rule  in  their  own  might.  If  they  are 
able  to  perfect  and  launch  their  diabolical  plans  — 
and  this  we  fully  expect  they  will  do,  for  people  and 
nations  are  sleeping  just  when  they  should  be  awake 
and  thinking  —  within  a  few  years  you  will  see 
enacted  pictures  like  these,"  Then  ten  or  twelve  war 
scenes  came  trooping  by.  They  were  scenes  that  we 
never  dreamed  could  actually  take  place  and  we  gave 
them  but  little  thought.  Emil  continued,  aWe  are 
hoping  almost  against  hope,  that  these  can  be 
averted.  Time  will  tell,  and  these  conditions  are  what 
we  are  hoping  will  prevail5'  Then  scenes  of  beauty 
and  peace  beyond  all  description  came  trooping  past, 
and  Emil  said,  "These  are  scenes  which  ^  all  of  you 
will  see  enacted,  but  we  wish  you  would,  in  so  far  as 
possible,  put  the  second  series  of  pictures  out  of  your 
minds,  as  that  will  help  us  more  than  you  think.9* 

After  a  short  pause  one  of  our  party  asked  what 
the  words  "Lord  God"  implied,  and  Emil  continued. 
"The  'Lord  God5  was  used  to  designate  the  Perfect 
Being  that  the  Divine  Principle,  or  God,  created  to 
bring  out  His  qualities  here  on  earth.  This  Being  was 
created  in  the  image  and  likeness  of  the  Divine 
Principle  and  had  access  to,  and  could  use,  every- 
thing that  the  Divine  Principle  had.  This  Being  was 
given  power  and  dominion  over  every  condition  that 
existed  upon  the  earth.  This  Being  had  all  the  poten- 
tialities of  the  Divine  Principle  and  the  power  to 
bring  them  forth  as  long  as  He  co-operated  with  the 
Divine  Principle  and  developed  the  faculties  that  had 

62 


TEACHING  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

been  given  Him,  in  the  idea!  way  that  the  Divine 
Principle  had  planned  or  was  holding  in  mind.  This 
Being  was  afterwards  called  'Lord  God,',  which 
meant  expression  in  creative  action^  or  the  Law^of 
God.  This  is  the  Perfect  Being  that  the  Divine  Prin- 
ciple holds  in  mind  for  man  to  express.  This  is  the 
Divine  and  Only  Man  that  the  Divine  Principle  cre- 
ated. Man,  on  the  spiritual  side  of  his  nature,  has 
access  to  and  can  become  this  Lord  God  or  One 
tJMan.  This  Divine  Man  afterwards  became  known 
"as  the  Christ.  He  had  dominion  over  heaven  and 
earth  and  al!  things  therein.  Then  the  Lord  God, 
using  His  power  to  create,  did  create  other  beings 
like  unto  Himself.  These  beings  were  afterwards 
called  sons  of  the  Lord  God,  and  their  Creator  was 
called  Father,  and  the  Divine  Principle  was  called 
God." 

Hero  he  paused  for  a  moment  and  held  out  his 
hand  and  almost  immediately  there  was  in  it  a  large 
piece  of  plastic  substance  that  resembled  clay.  This 
he  placed  on  the  table  and  began  molding  it  into  a 
form  which  afterwards  took  on  the  image  of  a  beau- 
tiful human  figure  about  six  inches  in  height.^  So 
deftly  did  he  work  that  the  image  was  finished  in  a 
very  short  time.  After  it  was  finished,  he  held  it  in 
both  hands  for  a  moment ;  then  he  held  it  up  and 
breathed  upon  it  and  it  became  animated.  He  held 
it  in  his  hands  for  a  moment  longer,  then  placed  it 
on  the  table,  where  it  moved  about.  It  acted  so  much 
like  a  human  being  that  we  never  asked  a  question, 
but  stood  with  our  mouths  and  eyes  wide  open  and 
stared. 

Emil  spoke,  quoting,  "  "And  the  Lord  God  cre- 
ated man  from  the  dust  of  the  ground  and  breathed 
into  his  nostrils  the  breath  of  life  and  he  became  a 

63 


THE  LIFE  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

living  soul.5  Then  sons  of  the  Lord  God  created  man 
from  the  dust  of  the  ground;  and  they  with  their 
creative  ability  breathed  the  breath  of  life  into  the 
statue,  and  it  became  a  living  soul.  The  genius  can 
do  this  with  his  pottery  or  handiwork.  If  he  leaves 
the  statue  or  picture  as  his  hands  form  it,  it  is  an 
image  and  he  has  no  responsibility;  but  if  he  goes 
on  and  uses  his  creative  power  to  put  life  into  it,  his 
responsibility  never  ceases.  He  must  keep  watch  of 
each  of  his  creations,  and  they  must  be  held  in  divine 
order.  This  is  where  man  in  one  way  lost  contact 
with  God.  He  made  images  like  these ;  then  he  did 
not  withdraw  the  life  which  he  in  his  ardor  had 
endowed  them  with,  and  they  wandered  over  the 
earth  without  purpose  or  aim.  Whereas,  had  he 
withdrawn  the  life  he  had  endowed  them  with,  there 
would  have  been  but  the  statue  and  his  responsibility 
would  have  ceased.55 

Here  the  image  stopped  moving,  and  Emil  con- 
tinued. "You  have  seen  the  clay  in  the  hands  of  the 
potter ;  but  it  is  man,  not  God,  that  is  manipulating 
the  clay.  Had  he  created  it  from  God's  pure  sub- 
stance as  he  was  created,  it,  like  him,  would  have 
been  a  pure  and  true  son.  This  will  be  much  clearer 
to  you  after  you  have  translated  the  first  series  of 
tablets.  As  it  is  late  I  think  you  would  like  to  retire.** 

As  soon  as  the  last  guest  had  departed,  we  pre- 
pared to  retire,  feeling  that  the  last  few  days  had 
been  filled  to  overflowing. 


VII 

THE  next  morning  we  took  up  the  regular  work 
of  translating.  In  order  to  get  as  clear  an 
Insight  as  possible  into  the  meaning  of  the 
characters  employed  in  compiling  the  records.  In 
fact,  we  were  learning  the  alphabet  of  this  ancient 
writing.  In  this  we  became  very  deeply  engrossed, 
with  our  hostess  as  teacher. 

We  had  been  occupied  In  this  work  for  about 
two  weeks  when  we  went  to  the  temple  one  morning 
and  found  our  friend  Chander  Sen,  who  had  appar- 
ently died  and  been  resurrected,  with  not  a  vestige 
of  old  age  about  him.  There  was  no  mistaking  him. 
As  we  came  into  the  room  he  arose  and  came  for- 
ward with  a  hearty  greeting  and  handshake.  You 
can  imagine  our  surprise  as  we  gathered  around  and 
began  to  ask  questions.  We  were  like  a  gang  of 
school  boys  turned  loose,  all  attempting  to  ask  ques- 
tions at  the  same  time.  But  the  fact  remained ;  there 
he  was,  with  the  unmistakable  form  and  voice,  but 
with  not  a  trace  of  old  age  about  him.  Even  the  voice 
had  regained  the  vibrant  quality  of  middle  age,  and 
everything  about  him  showed  the  quality  of  a  well- 
developed  life,  buoyant  and  keenly  alive.  The  ex- 
pression of  the  eyes  and  face  was  far  beyond  any- 
thing that  I  could  put  into  words. 

In  the  first  few  moments  we  could  do  nothing 
but  picture  to  ourselves  the  contrast.  When  we  had 
first  seen  him,  he  was  a  decrepit  old  man,  leaning  on 
a  long  staff  for  support ;  with  long  snow-white  locks, 
halting  step,  and  emaciated  form.  One  of  our  party 
had  remarked  when  we  first  met  him,  "Here  we 
find  among  these  great  souls,  one  so  aged  that  he 

€5 


THE  LIFE  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

seems  ready  to  pass  to  the  great  beyond/9  Of  course 
the  transformation  which  we  had  witnessed  just  a 
few  days  previous  had  left  its  impression;  but  Ms 
sudden  disappearance  had  rather  taken  him  and  the 
incident  out  of  our  minds,  as  we  did  not  think  we 
would  ever  see  him  again.  It  was  more  than  a  re- 
juvenation. I  can  compare  it  only  to  the  transfigur- 
ation of  the  One  we  love  and  respect  so  dearly.  That 
soul  was  surely  reborn,  judging  from  the  contrast 
between  his  appearance  the  first  time  we  met  him 
and  the  way  he  looked  this  morning.  It  is  true  that 
we  had  known  him  only  a  short  time,  but  we  had 
been  thrown  in  daily  contact  with  him  for  a  sufficient 
time  to  see  and  know  that  he  was  an  old  man.  He 
was  with  us  for  nearly  two  years  after  this,  acting  as 
our  guide  and  interpreter  across  the  great  Gobi, 
Years  after,  when  two  or  three  of  the  party  would 
meet  and  our  experiences  were  recalled,  the  experi- 
ence of  that  morning  would  be  the  first  subject 
brought  up. 

In  recounting  these  events,  I  am  not  going  to 
attempt  to  follow  our  whole  conversation  and  record 
it  word  for  word,  for  we  consumed  the  greater  part 
of  two  days  in  just  talking,  and  I  believe  a  detailed 
account  would  be  tedious  reading.  Therefore  in  this 
instance  I  shall  bring  out  only  the  main  points. 

After  the  first  excitement  had  abated  somewhat, 
we  were  seated,  and  he  began,  "As  the  body  repre- 
sents the  lowest  degree  of  thought  activities,  so  the 
Spirit  represents  the  highest  thoughts  of  Divine 
Mind.  As  the  body  is  the  outer  expression  of  the 
thought,  so  the  Spirit  is  that  in  which  the  form 
takes  its  initial  impulse  direct  from  the  Divine  Mind. 
It  is  the  immortal  and  real  Self,  in  which  resides  all 
the  potentialities  of  Divine  Mind.1 

66 


OF  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

csThc  thought  atmosphere  is  a  real,  substantial 
and  has  in  It  all  that  makes  the  body.  So  many 
people  consider  the  things  that  they  can  not  see  as 
unsubstantial ;  and  although  they  are  told,  over  and 
over  that  they  cannot  conceal  themselves,  they  go 
right  on  believing  that  they  can.  Did  Adam  and  Eve 
conceal  themselves  when  they  were  hiding  from  the 
Lord,  or  Law  of  God?  It  is  well  for  us  to  know  the 
truth  that  we  carry  around  with  us  the  open  book  of 
our  lives,  out  of  which  all  men  read  whether  we 
realize  it  or  not.  Some  people  are  good  thought  read- 
ers, while  others  are  dull;  but  all  can  read  a  little 
and  we  can  not  conceal  ourselves.  Also  our  thought 
atmosphere  is  constantly  precipitating  its  slowly  cool- 
ing words  on  our  body  and  there  it  is  seen  by  all  men. 
We  can,  with  a  little  practice,  feel  the  thought  force 
of  this  atmosphere  that  surrounds  us,  and  gradually 
gain  a  realization  of  its  existence  as  real  as  that  of 
the  outer  world. 

"I  have  learned  that  just  as  man  may  touch  the 
earth  with  his  feet,  so  OQ  the  wings  of  aspiration  may 
he  soar  to  celestial  heights.  Like  those  of  old,  he  may 
walk  the  earth  and  talk  with  God ;  and  the  more  he 
does  so,  the  more  difficult  it  will  be  for  him  to  dis- 
cover where  Universal  Life  ends  and  where  indi- 
vidual existence  begins.  When  man  forms  an  alli- 
ance with  God  through  spiritual  understanding,  the 
boundary  line  between  God  and  man  disappears. 
When  this  point  is  reached,  man  will  know  what 
Jesus  meant  when  He  said,  *I  and  my  Father  are 


one.* 


"The  great  philosophers  through  the  ages  have 
accepted  the  idea  of  man  as  a  trinity,  but  it  never 
was  their  belief  that  he  has  a  triple  personality.  They 


THE  LIFE  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

have  considered  him  a  being  who  in  his  nature  is 
triune. 

"The  tendency  to  personalize  all  things  has  de- 
graded that  which  is  called  the  Blessed  Trinity  into 
the  impossible  conception  of  three  in  one;  when  it 
can  be  best  understood  as  the  Omnipresence,  Om- 
nipotence, Omniscience  of  the  Universal  Mind,  God. 
As  long  as  men  consider  the  Blessed  Trinity  as  three 
persons  in  one,  and  as  something  that  must  be  ac- 
cepted even  though  it  cannot  be  explained,  they  will 
dwell  in  the  wilderness  of  superstition,  and  thus  of 
doubt  and  fear, 

"If  the  triune  nature  of  God  is  spiritual  rather 
than  physical,  then  the  trinity  in  man  must  be  seen 
from  a  mental  rather  than  from  a  material  point  of 
view.  One  of  the  wise  philosophers  has  said,  *Despis- 
ing  everything  else,  a  wise  man  should  strive  after  a 
knowledge  of  Self ;  for  there  is  no  knowledge  that  is 
higher,  or  that  brings  more  satisfaction  of  power, 
than  a  knowledge  of  his  own  being.'  If  a  man  knows 
his  real  Self,  he  cannot  do  otherwise  than  discover 
his  latent  possibilities,  his  concealed  powers,  his  dor- 
mant faculties.  Of  what  avail,  if  a  man  should  cgain 
the  whole  world  and  lose  his  own  soul?'  His  soul  is 
his  spiritual  self,  and  if  he  truly  discovers  his  spirit- 
ual self  he  can  build  a  whole  world  if  he  is  serving 
his  fellow-men  by  so  doing.  I  have  learned  that  he 
who  would  attain  the  ultimate  goal  must  search  the 
depths  of  his  real  Self,  and  there  he  will  find  God, 
the  fullness  of  all  good.  It  is  because  man  is  a  trinity 
in  unity — composed  of  spirit,  soul,  and  body — that 
in  a  state  of  spiritual  ignorance  he  has  the  tendency 
to  think  on  a  level  with  the  lowest  degree  of  his 
nature,  which  is  the  physical. 

"The  ignorant  man  looks  to  his  body  for  all  the 

68 


TEACHING  OF  THE   MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

pleasure  he  gets,  and  there  connes  a  time  when  he 
gets  from  the  senses  all  the  pain  that  he  can  stand. 
What  he  does  not  learn  through  wisdom  he  must 
learn  through  woe,  and  after  repeated  experiences 
he  will  not  deny  that  wisdom  Is  the  better  way.  Jesus, 
Osiris,  and  Buddha  said  that  with  all  our  under- 
standing, we  must  get  wisdom. 

"Thought,  operating  on  the  plane  of  the  intellec- 
tual, raises  the  vibrations  of  the  body  to  a  point 
which  corresponds  to  liquid.  On  this  plane,  thought 
is  neither  wholly  material  nor  wholly  spiritual  It  is 
vibrating  like  a  pendulum  between  materiality  and 
spirituality,  but  there  comes  a  time  when  one  must 
choose  which  one  he  will  serve.  If  he  chooses  mate- 
riality, a  world  of  confusion  and  chaos  awaits  him, 
He  may  choose  the  spirit ;  and  If  he  does  so  choose, 
he  may  ascend  to  the  dome  of  the  temple  of  God 
In  man.  This  state  of  thought  can  be  compared  to 
the  gaseous  in  matter,  which  Is  elastic  and  tends  to 
expand  indefinitely.  God  always  leaves  It  for  man  to 
say  whether  he  will  control  his  fluldlc  stream  of 
thought  In  the  direction  of  those  celestial  heights 
which  bear  him  above  the  fog  line  of  doubt,  fear,  sin, 
and  sickness;  or  let  It  sink  to  the  sordid  depths  of 
the  animal  In  man. 

"If  In  thinking  of  man  as  a  trinity  of  spirit,  mind, 
and  body,  we  consider  him  principally  from  the 
standpoint  of  mind,  or  soul,  we  shall  see  that  he 
occupies  a  position  between  two  great  extremes  of 
mental  activity,  the  lower  of  which  Is  the  body,  and 
the  higher,  the  spirit.  Mind  is  the  connecting  link 
between  the  visible  and  invisible.  Operating  on  the 
plane  of  the  senses,  the  mind  becomes  the  seat  of  all 
the  animal  appetites  and  passions.  It  is  the  serpent 
In  man's  Garden  of  Eden  which  beguiles  him  into 

69 


THE  LIFE  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

partaking  of  the  poison  fruit.  When  Jesus  said,  *As 
Moses  lifted  up  the  serpent  in  the  wilderness,  even 
so  must  the  son  of  man  be  lifted  up/  he  was  not 
referring  to  the  raising  of  his  body  on  the  cross,  but 
to  the  elevation  of  the  soul,  or  mind,  above  sense 
delusions.  Standing  between  spirit  and  body,  though 
separated  from  neither,  the  soul  or  mind  is  capable 
of  thinking  even  lower  than  the  brute  thinks;  or  it 
may  enter  into  conscious  union  with  pure  spirit 
where  there  is  an  abundance  of  peace,  purity*  and 
God  Power. 

"When  the  son  of  man  is  lifted  up  to  that  realm 
in  which  he  rises  above  the  fallacies  of  the  physical 
realm,  he  thinks  and  acts  on  the  plane  of  pure  intelli- 
gence. There  he  discriminates  between  those  instincts 
which  he  shares  with  every  other  animal  and  those 
divine  intuitions  which  he  has  in  common  with  God. 
I  have  been  shown  that  when  man  thinks  on  a  plane 
with  pure  spirit,  the  soul  enters  consciously  that 
realm  wherein  it  .perceives  the  ideal  of  things,  rather 
than  the  things  themselves.  It  is  no  longer  dependent 
upon  the  senses,  but  with  clearer  vision  it  sees  the 
broad  horizon's  grander  view.  It  is  here  that  truth 
is  revealed  by  Divine  Intelligence  and  speaks  the 
inspiring  and  health-giving  message. 

"When  the  son  of  man  has  been  lifted  from  the 
depth  of  his  material  world,  and  has  been  surround- 
ed by  pictures  of  tranquil  beauty  and  refinement  of 
the  mental  world,  after  a  time  he  is  seized  with  a 
healthy  dissatisfaction,  and  the  ever-upward  urge  of 
the  soul  bears  him  to  higher  realms.  There  he  no 
longer  sees  the  pictures  of  tranquillity  but  dwells  in 
the  land  of  tranquillity,  surrounded  by  perpetual 
beauty.  He  has  glimpsed  the  inner,  and  to  him  that 
has  become  the  all ;  and  the  outer  has  become  the 

70 


OF  OF  FAR  EAST 

inner.  He  lives  in  a  world  of  where  before 

he  moved  in  a  world  of  effects. 

*sThe  spirit  of  triune  man  is  pure  intelligence, 
region  of  his  being  where  neither  sense  testi- 
mony nor  human  opinion  has  any  weight  against 
ascertained  truth ;  it  is  the  Christ  within,  or  the  Son 
of  God  in  the  son  of  man,  the  discovery  of  which  sets 
at  rest  doubt  and  its  discouragements.  It  is  from  this 
pinnacle  of  his  being  that  man  views  all  things  with 
the  clear  vision  of  the  educated  soul.  He  beholds 
more  things  in  heaven  and  upon  earth  than  are 
dreamed  of  in  any  philosophy.  When  he  has  learned 
that  he  is  not  body  with  a  mind  which  is  ruled  either 
from  within  or  without,  but  that  both  can  be  made 
obedient  servants  to  his  real  spiritual  self,  he  has 
brought  into  expression  that  God-given  dominion 
with  which  he  was  originally  endowed. 

"Spirit  is  the  supreme  essence  of  man's  being.  It 
is  never  diseased  and  never  unhappy,  for  as  that 
great  soul,  Emerson,  says,  slt  is  the  finite  that  suffers. 
The  infinite  lies  stretched  in  smiling  repose.5  Job  of 
your  Bible  told  you  that  man  was  Spirit  and  the 
breath  of  the  Almighty  gave  him  life.  It  is  indeed 
the  Spirit  in  man  which  gives  life,  and  that  Spirit 
rules  Ms  lower  activities.  Spirit  issues  commands  with 
authority,  and  all  things  become  subordinate  to 
righteous  rule, 

**A  new  era,  wrapped  in  the  garment  of  ap- 
proaching day,  is  dawning  in  the  hearts  of  men; 
and  soon  again  will  the  virgin  Spirit  of  God  shine 
forth  from  the  heart,  and  the  door  again  will  open, 
by  which  all  who  will  may  find  entrance  to  a  larger 
and  fuller  life.  Young,  vibrant,  with  perennial  youth 
and  hope  and  endeavor,  the  soul  of  man  stands  on 
the  threshold  of  a  new  era,  more  glorious  than  any 

yi 


THE  LIFE  OF  THE  MASTERS -OF 'THE  FAR  EAST 

other  that  has  brightened  the  sky  since  Creation's 
dawn.  The  Star  of  Bethlehem  shone  brighter  at  Jesus' 
birth  than  it  had  before^  but  soon  its  brightness  will 
be  like  the  noonday  sun,  for  this  new  light  foretells 
the  day  when  the  Christ  is  born  in  the  hearts  of  all 
men/9 


VIII 

THE  next  morning  Chancier  Sen  continued  his 
talk.  "I  have  been  shown  beyond  a  question 
of  doubt  that  the  human  intelligence  can  be 
transmuted  into  Divine  Intelligence.  As  this  was 
made  plain  to  me,  I  found  that  I  could  enter  the 
Kingdom  of  God,  and  that  that  Kingdom  was  right 
within.  Now  I  know  that  God  is  the  only  power, 
Omnipresent  and  Omniscient ;  and  that  sin,  discord, 
sickness,  old  age,  and  death  belong  only  to  a  past 
experience.  I  now  perceive  the  reality  and  know  that 
I  had  been  lost  in  the  mist  of  illusion.  Time  and 
space  have  completely  disappeared ;  and  I  know  that 
I  now  dwell  in  the  subjective  and  that  it  belongs  to 
the  objective  world.  Had  it  been  possible  for  me  to 
have  held  to  the  promptings  and  the  glimpses  the 
finer  senses  have  revealed  from  time  to  time,  how 
many  weary  and  anxious  hours  would  I  have  been 
saved.  While  in  youth  I,  like  the  greater  portion  of 
humanity,  decided  that  there  was  but  one  life  to  live 
and  that  was  the  gratification  of  self  in  every  way ; 
so  I  determined  to  get  the  most  out  of  that  life.  I 
made  self-seeking  the  principal  aim  in  life,  and  I 
gave  the  animal  passions  full  sway,  with  the  result 
that  I  dissipated  the  life  fluids  of  my  body  until  it 
was  but  the  empty  shell  that  you  first  saw.  Let  me 
bring  forth  a  picture  that  will  more  graphically 
illustrate  my  thoughts.5* 

He  sat  silent  for  a  moment,  and  a  picture  like 
those  already  described  appeared  upon  one  wall  of 
the  room.  This  was  the  picture  of  himself  as  we  had 
seen  him  a  short  time  ago.  It  was  that  of  an  old  man, 

73 


THE  LIFE  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

tottering  along,  leaning  on  his  wooden  staff.  Follow- 
ing this  was  the  likeness  of  the  man  as  he  appeared 
this  morning.  He  continued,  "The  irst  represents  the 
one  who  has  dissipated  the  energies  and  life  fluids 
of  his  body  until  nothing  but  the  empty  shell  re- 
mains. The  other  represents  the  one  who  has  con- 
served his  energies  and  the  vital  life  fluids  within  his 
body.  You  look  upon  this  in  my  case  as  a  complete 
and  entire  rejuvenation,  which  is  true.  But  I  look 
at  it  from  another  angle.  How  many  could  be  as 
fortunate  as  1  was,  to  have  the  help,  sympathy,  and 
assistance  of  those  dear  ones  as  I  have  had? 

"In  order  that  you  may  get  my  thought,  let  us 
follow  the  life  of  a  person  from  birth  to  the  end,  as 
so  many  look  upon  death.  The  child  is  bom.  It  is 
unconscious  of  the  life-carrying  fluids  which  course 
through  its  body,  as  they  are  inactive  because  the 
organs  that  generate  life  fluids  are  inactive  and  not 
yet  developed.  During  this  stage  of  development,  if 
the  child  is  normal,  it  is  beautiful,  active,  and  bub* 
bling  over  with  life.  The  life  fluids  are  built  up 
stronger  and  stronger,  until  the  child  reaches  the 
stage  of  development  where  the  life  fluids  are  active, 
and  they  may  be  dissipated.  If  this  dissipation  takes 
place,  in  a  few  years  the  child  begins  to  show  age, 
The  eyes  lose  their  luster,  the  body  its  activity  and 
grace ;  the  features  become  set ;  in  a  few  more  years 
the  brain  loses  its  power  of  co-ordination  with  the 
muscles,  and  the  body  is  that  of  a  decrepit  old  man 
or  woman,  but  the  empty  shell  of  the  former  sell 

"Then  take  the  person  who  has  conserved  all  the 
life  fluids  and  allowed  them  to  circulate  in  their 
natural  course  through  the  body,  and  see  how  strong 
and  vigorous  that  one  is.  Should  that  one  go,  on  al- 
ways conserving  the  life  fluids,  even  though  he  did 

74 


TEACHING  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

not  perceive  any  higher  idea  of  life  than  to  be  born, 
live  a  short  time  upon  this  earth3  then  pass  on,  the 
of  that  ife  would  be  extended  from  three  to 
four  times  that  of  the  person  who  has  dissipated  the 
life  fluids.  If  he  does  perceive  that  there  Is  a  greater 
scheme  In  Gocf s  plan  for  him,  he  will  at  all  times 
conserve  the  life  fluids  In  the  body,  as  he  soon  finds 
that  they  are  a  necessary  adjunct  for  perfect  devel- 
opment. 

<clt  was  only  a  short  time  ago  that  your  learned 
men  began  to  know  of  the  delicate  system  of  arter- 
ies and  veins  composing  the  circulatory  system  of 
your  bodies.  It  Is  still  left  for  them  to  determine  that 
there  Is  a  far  more  delicate  and  subtle  circulatory 
system  throughout  the  body,  which  carries  the  life 
force  to  every  atom.  Through  your  nervous  system 
this  life  force  Is  sent  to  a  set  of  cells  In  the  brain. 
These  cells  In  turn  act  as  a  distributor  for  the  force 
and  it  is  sent  out  to  every  atom  of  the  body,  along 
the  nerves,  for  which  It  has  an  affinity.  It  also  acts  as 
a  protection  for  the  nerves.  If  the  life  force  Is  dis- 
sipated, the  cells  become  set  and  can  not  change  for 
the  new  cells  (that  are  formed  to  take  their  place) 
and  the  new  cells  are  thrown  off  instead  of  the  old 
ones,  which  gradually  decompose  and  die.  If  the  life 
force  is  conserved,  the  cells  change  as  readily  at  five 
hundred  years  as  at  ten. 

<clt  will  be  found  that  when  all  the  life  force  Is 
conserved,  the  body  can  be  so  charged  with  life  that 
you  can  speak  life  Into  all  forms.  You  can  paint  a 
picture,  model  a  statue,  or  take  any  of  your  handi- 
work that  expresses  your  Ideal  and  breathe  the 
breath  of  life  Into  It,  and  It  will  become  alive.  It  will 
speak  to  you  and  to  others  who  can  see  the  life 
Inspiration  that  you  have  spoken  Into  It ;  and  it  will 

75 


THE  LIFE  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE   FAR  EAST 

be  active  because  you,  the  Lord  God  of  you,  has 
spoken,  and  it  is  as  He  wills.  But  those  forms  will 
not  assume  the  human,  unless  you  carry  them  to  the 
God  Life.  If  you  do  give  them  life  you  must  carry 
them  through  to  the  pure  God  Life;  then  they  are 
perfect  forms,  as  you  are  perfect,  and  you  have 
fulfilled  your  responsibility.  This  you  will  find  is 
true  genius. 

"There  is  one  vital  error  that  I  wish  to  point  out. 
The  genius,  as  you  consider  him,  as  he  begins  to 
develop,  has  consciously  or  unconsciously  acquired 
the  ability  to  conserve  and  send  the  life  forces  in 
their  purity  through  their  natural  channels;  this 
condition  has  animated  his  body  and  the  creative 
faculty,  and  he  sees  that  there  is  something  higher 
for  him  to  express  than  the  ordinary.  While  he  con- 
serves the  life  forces  and  gives  them  free  rein,  he 
will  go  on  to  more  and  more  glorious  achievements ; 
but  if  he  allows  sex  lust  to  creep  in,  he  quickly  loses 
his  creative  power.  The  body  has  been  first  built  up 
by  conserving  the  life  forces  until  the  cells  are  of  a 
finer  texture  than  the  lower  order  of  person  who  has 
dissipated  the  life  force.  By  this  time  the  genius  has 
risen  to  fame,  and  not  having  developed  his  deeper 
perceptive  or  God  power,  is  carried  away  by  self- 
glory.  He  forsakes  his  guiding  light  because  he  has 
not  been  fully  awakened;  in  the  urge  for  greater 
excitement,  he  begins  to  dissipate  the  life  forces,  and 
quickly  loses  all  power.  For  if  man  does  raise  his 
thought  above  the  animal  passions,  and  conserves  the 
life  forces  until  the  body  has  begun  to  take  on  the 
finer  texture,  then  allows  himself  to  fall  back,  he 
will  go  back  much  more  rapidly  than  one  that  has 
not  been  thus  awakened. 

"When  one  has  been  awakened  so  that  he  will 

76 


TEACHING  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

conserve  all  the  life  forces  and  let  them  be  distributed 

to  the  nerves  in  the  natural  way,  then  let  them  go 
coursing  along  the  nerves  to  every  atom  of  the  body, 
without  deforming  it  with  thoughts  of  sex-lust  or 
passion,  the  exhiiiration  will  be  permanent,  and  the 
sensation  will  far  transcend  that  of  sex.  The  serpent 
will  be  lifted  up  and  will  not  need  to  crawl  on  its 
belly  through  the  murk  and  mire  of  lust  and  passion. 

"If  man  could  understand  that  this  life  fluid  is 
many  times  more  vital  than  a  corresponding  amount 
of  pure  blood,  he  would  conserve  instead  of  dissi- 
pate it.  But  he  shuts  his  eyes  to  this  fact  (he  may 
be  entirely  ignorant  of  it)  and  goes  on,  either  in 
blindness  or  ignorance,  until  the  Reaper  arrives. 
Then  a  wail  goes  up,  for  he  does  not  admire  the 
harvest. 

"You  look  upon  old  age  with  veneration  and 
snow-white  locks  as  a  crown  of  honor,  which  I  would 
not  detract  from  in  any  way.  But  as  you  look  upon 
the  picture,  I  leave  it  for  you  to  decide  which  is  the 
more  to  be  honored ;  he  with  the  snow-white  locks, 
who  has  by  ignorance  or  direct  perversity  brought 
decrepitude  upon  himself ;  or  the  one  who,  in  matur- 
ity, becomes  more  vital,  stronger,  and  better  equip- 
ped to  meet  the  advancing  years,  and  because  of 
them  is  more  kind  and  generous.  I  recognize  that  the 
one  who  reaches  the  end  through  ignorance  is  to  be 
pitied,  while  the  one  who  knows,  and  reaches  the 
same  end,  is  unspeakable." 


77 


CHAPTER  IX 

FROM  this  time  on  we  applied  ourselves  dili- 
gently to  learn  our  alphabet  with  Chander  Sen 
as  our  instructor.  The  days  passed  altogether  too 
quickly,  and  April  was  drawing  to  a  close  with  the 
greater  part  of  the  records  still  to  be  translated ;  but 
we  were  consoling  ourselves  that  we  would  be  able 
to  return  and  finish  the  translations.  Although  our 
friends  had  translated  a  large  portion  of  these  rec- 
ords for  us,  they  had  insisted  upon  our  study  of  the 
characters  so  that  we  would  be  able  to  translate 
them  for  ourselves. 

During  the  preceding  September,  we  had  ar- 
ranged to  meet  a  party  in  the  Gobi  Desert  and  they 
were  to  accompany  us  to  the  site  of  three  of  the 
ancient  ruined  cities,  the  locations  of  which  are 
given  by  some  of  these  records.  While  we  had  not,  as 
yet,  seen  these  records,  we  had  been  told  of  their 
existence.  Those  which  we  had  previously  seen  and 
which  had  aroused  our  curiosity  were  but  copies  of 
the  records  we  had  before  us.  Both  of  the  sets  place 
the  dates  of  these  cities  back  two  hundred  thousand 
years.  It  is  claimed  that  the  inhabitants  were  in  a 
high  state  of  civilization,  as  they  knew  the  arts  and 
crafts  and  were  able  to  work  with  the  metals ;  that 
gold  was  a  very  common  metal,  so  common  that  they 
used  it  in  malting  drinking  vessels  and  for  shoeing 
their  horses.  It  is  claimed  that  these  people  had  a 
good  command  over  all  the  natural  forces  as  well  as 
their  own  God-given  powers.  In  fact,  the  legends — 
if  legends  they  are — as  told  therein  are  quite  similar 
to  those  of  Greek  mythology.  If  the  maps  are  correct, 


TEACHING  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

huge  empire  covered  the  greater  portion  of  Asia 
and  extended  into  Europe  as  far  as  the  Mediterran- 
ean Sea,  where  France  is  now  located,  and  the  great- 
est elevation  was  about  six  hundred  feet  above  sea 
level  It  is  claimed  that  this  was  a  great  plain  areaf 
very  productive  and  well  populated,  and  a  colony  of 
the  Motherland.  There  is  no  question  that,  if  the 
remains  of  these  cities  can  be  found  and  uncovered^ 
some  very  valuable  history  will  be  disclosed,  as  the 
description  the  records  gave  of  this  country  far  out- 
shone that  of  ancient  Egypt  for  pomp  and  splendor 
during  the  dynasties  of  its  seven  kings.  Even  before 
the  reign  of  these  kings,  it  is  described  as  being  far 
more  prosperous.  The  people  ruled  themselves; 
there  were  no  wars  and  no  vassals  or  slaves.  They 
unquestionably  named  their  ruler,  "Directive  Prin- 
ciple," and  they  loved  and  obeyed  that  Directive 
Principle.  These  records  state  that  the  first  king  of 
the  first  dynasty  usurped  the  rule  from  the  Directive 
Principle  and  set  himself  upon  a  throne  as  ruler. 

Time  had  passed  rapidly.  We  were  busy  getting 
everything  in  readiness  to  join  the  expedition,  as  we 
were  obliged  to  be  on  our  way  in  order  to  keep  our 
appointment  in  May  at  the  meeting  place  agreed 
upon,  where  we  were  to  replenish  our  supplies  and 
equip  the  main*  expedition  for  the  final  journey. 

Words  absolutely  fail  me  when  I  undertake  to 
record  my  thoughts  and  feelings  as  the  time  for  our 
departure  drew  near.  Every  hour  of  our  stay  had 
been  a  joy,  not  one  being  dull 

Although  we  had  been  with  these  people  and 
shared  their  homes  for  more  than  five  months,  the 
time  had  passed  so  rapidly  that  it  seemed  but  a  few 
days.  Yet  a  world  of  possibilities  had  been  opened  to 
us.  It  was  as  though  the  door  had  been  thrown  wide 

79 


THE  LIFE  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

open.  Everyone  felt  the  boundless  possibilities — and 
still  we  hesitated  to  step  through  the  door,  just  as 
we  hesitated  to  leave  these  magnificent  people  whom 
we  looked  upon  as  brothers. 

I  believe  there  is  a  time  in  the  life  of  every  mortal 
when  he  or  she  can  see  the  door  fully  opened— just 
as  each  of  us  saw  it  that  beautiful  April  morning— 
and  each  and  every  one  can  see  the  vast  possibilities 
that  may  be  attained.  (I  am  going  to  ask  the  readers 
to  throw  aside  all  prejudices  for  a  time,  and,  if  they 
are  able  to  do  so,  see  as  we  saw.  I  do  not  expect  you 
to  believe,  but  I  do  want  you  to  understand  that  it 
is  one  thing  to  write  about  these  people  and  an  en- 
tirely different  thing  just  to  sit  at  their  feet  and 
listen.)  It  seemed  that  if  we  would  walk  boldly  up 
and  step  through  the  door,  all  attainment  would  be 
ours — yet  We  hesitated.  Why  was  it  so?  Because  we 
did  not  fully  believe ;  we  allowed  tradition  to  drag  us 
back  and  close  the  door ;  then  we  said  the  hand  ^of 
fate  had  closed  it  to  us.  But  we  must  come  to  realize 
there  is  no  fate  save  that  which  we  ourselves  allow. 

Here  were  a  kindly,  simple,  yet  most  magnificent 
people,  some  of  whom  for  generations  and  perhaps 
always,  have  lived  just  through  that  door,  and  that 
life  is  practical  to  them.  There  is  no  precedent  nor 
tradition  here,  nothing  but  a  pure,  honest  life,  well 
lived  and  lived  right  here  on  this  earth.  I  leave  it  to 
the  reader  to  make  the  contrast. 

We  did  hesitate  to  leave  these  dear  kindly  souls 
to  whom  we  had  become  so  attached  in  the  last  few 
months,  yet  we  knew  that  other  things  awaited  us 
and  we  looked  forward  eagerly  to  them.  We  bade 
our  friends  good-by  that  beautiful  April  morning, 
with  cordial  handshakes  and  salutations,  amid  hearty 
Invitations  to  come  a§ain.  With  a  final  goodby  and 

80 


TEACHING  OF  THE   MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

Godspeed,  our  faces  were  turned  northward,  this 
time  actually  to  cross  the  great  Gobi,  with  its  tales  of 
terrible  hardships  as  dim  visions  in  our  imaginations ; 
but  we  were  unafraid,  for  Emil  and  Jast  were  again 
with  us,  and  Chander  Sen  in  Neprow's  place. 

To  us,  who  had  visited  many  lands,  as  the  com- 
pany swung  along  on  the  trail  it  was  but  a  part  of 
the  day's  work.  Everyone  in  our  little  band  was  glad 
to  be  there.  Not  one  but  recognized  that  a  new  world 
had  begun  to  open  and  unfold.  All  recognized  the 
remoteness  of  the  country  and  the  hazards  of  an 
ordinary  trip  of  this  nature,  yet  there  was  that  irre- 
sistible urge  to  go  on.  With  the  absolute  confidence 
we  had  in  our  great  friends,  all  fear,  or  thought  of 
inconvenience  for  self  was  thrown  to  the  winds  and 
we  entered  into  the  zest  of  the  thing  with  the  en- 
thusiasm of  schoolboys. 

We  were  accustomed  to  the  remote  places  of  the 
earth,  but  never  had  we  experienced  a  country  so 
remote,  yet  one  where  we  could  travel  with  the  free- 
dom and  ease  that  we  were  experiencing  here.  Do 
you  wonder  that  we  were  infatuated  with  the  coun-» 
try  and  our  benefactors?  We  felt  that  we  could  go 
right  on  north  until  we  had  negotiated  the  polar 
regions  and  conquered  them.  We  had  not  gone  far 
when  one  of  our  party  remarked,  "If  we  could  travel 
as  those  fellows  can,  this  part  would  be  easy.  Just 
because  we  can  not  travel  as  they  do,  they  plod  along 
with  us." 

All  went  well  until  the  evening  of  the  seventh 
day  out.  At  about  five  o'clock  that  afternoon,  we 
were  just  emerging  from  a  deep  ravine  which  we 
had  followed  down  in  order  to  gain  access  to  the 
more  open  country  below,  when  one  of  the  party 
called  out  that  there  were  horsemen  in  the  distance. 

81 


THE  LIFE  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

We  turned  our  glasses  upon  them  and  counted 
twenty-seven  horsemen  who  seemed  to  be  fully 
armed.  We  reported  this  to  Jast  and  he  said  they 
probably  were  one  of  the  roving  bands  that  infest 
the  country.  We  asked  If  they  were  one  of  the  bandit 
bands  and  he  said  that  he  suspected  they  were,  as 
they  did  not  appear  to  be  tending  any  flocks. 

We  left  the  trail  and  proceeded  to  a  clump  of 
trees  and  made  camp  for  the  night.  While  the  camp 
was  being  prepared,  two  of  our  party  crossed  the 
stream  near  which  we  were  camping,  and  climbed 
to  the  top  of  a  ridge  that  would  give  them  an  out- 
look over  the  rolling  country.  When  they  had  gained 
the  summit  they  stopped,  and,  placing  their  field 
glasses  to  their  eyes,  stood  for  a  moment,  then  turned 
and  hurried  toward  camp.  As  soon  as  they  came 
within  hailing  distance  they  reported  that  the  party 
of  horsemen  was  not  over  three  miles  away  and  was 
riding  toward  our  camp.  At  this  time  someone  re- 
marked that  he  believed  it  was  going  to  storm.  We 
looked,  and  sure  enough  there  was  a  heavy  bank  of 
clouds  gathering  in  the  northwest,  and  fog  was  drift- 
ing in  from  every  direction.  We  became  very  uneasy 
as  we  could  now  see  the  band  of  horsemen  through 
the  approaching  storm,  coming  down  a  rolling  slope 
directly  toward  our  camp.  We  were  very  much  dis- 
turbed about  the  appearance  of  this  band.  Although 
there  were  thirty-two  in  our  party,  we  did  not  have 
a  firearm  of  any  description. 

At  that  moment  the  storm  broke  upon  us  with 
all  the  fury  of  a  blizzard.  For  a  few  moments  the 
wind  lashed  and  roared  and  drove  the  fine  particles 
of  snow  around  us  with  the  fury  of  a  seventy-mile 
gale,  and  it  looked  as  if  we  would  be  obliged  to  move 
our  camp  to  escape  the  falling  limbs  that  were  being 

82 


TEACHING  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

broken  from  the  trees  by  the  storm.  Then  everything 
became  calm  where  we  were,  and  we  thought  for  a 
moment  that  It  had  been  only  a  squall,  such  as  often 
happens  in  that  country,  and  that  it  would  soon  blow 
over. 

Since  there  was  a  dim  half  light  which  enabled 
us  to  see,  we  turned  to  and  set  the  camp  in  order. 
We  were  occupied  with  this  work  for  about  half  an 
hour  and  had  not  given  a  thought  to  either  the  storm 
or  the  supposed  bandits  who  had  caused  so  much 
uneasiness  a  short  time  before.  As  we  stopped  a 
moment  for  breath,  our  Chief  walked  to  the  entrance 
of  the  tent  and  looked  out ;  then  turned  and  said, 
"The  storm  seems  to  be  raging  a  short  distance  away, 
but  where  we  are  there  is  scarcely  a  breath  of  air 
stirring.  Just  look,  the  tents  and  trees  around  are 
hardly  moving  and  the  air  seems  warm  and  balmy." 
A  number  of  our  party  followed  him  outside  and  we 
stood  for  a  moment  wondering.  While  we  had  been 
in  the  tent  and  occupied,  we  had  been  half  conscious 
of  the  noise  the  storm  was  making  but  we  supposed  it 
had  blown  over  and  was  traveling  up  the  ravine,  as 
some  of  the  storms  in*  that  country  come  on  like  a 
cyclone  and  travel  for  miles  before  they  expend  their 
fury,  and  after  they  have  passed  there  is  a  dead 
calm.  This  was  not  the  case  here.  The  blizzard  was 
raging  with  all  its  fury  within  a  hundred  feet  of  us, 
but  where  we  stood  the  air  was  still  and  warm.  Our 
former  experience  had  been  that  the  cold  was  intense 
and  pierced  one  through  and  through,  while  the 
wind  drove  the  icy  needle-like  particles  of  snow 
around  and  along  with  it  in  blinding  fury  until  one 
was  nearly  suffocated. 

Suddenly  the  circle  lighted  up  as  if  by  magic.  As 
we  stood  wondering,  we  thought  we  heard  shouts  of 

83 


THE  LIFE  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

men  above  the  din  of  the  storm.  Supper  was  an- 
nounced ;  we  went  In  and  sat'  down.  While  we  were 
eating,  one  of  the  party  wondered  what  had  become 
of  the  horsemen  we  had  seen  descending  the  slope. 
Another  said,  "We  thought  we  had  heard  shouts 
while  we  were  outside  and  wondered  if  we  could  not 
be  of  some  assistance  in  case  they  were  lost  in  the 
blizzard."  Jast  stated  that  these  men  belonged^  to 
one  of  the  most  notorious  bands  of  bandits  which 
roamed  the  nearby  country ;  he  added  that  they  did 
nothing  but  rob  and  plunder  villages  and  drive  off 
the  herds  of  sheep  and  goats.  After  supper,  during  a 
lull  in  the  storm,  we  could  hear  shouting  and  the 
lunging  and  snorting  of  horses,  sounding  as  though 
they  would  break  from  control.  Although  they 
seemed  but  a  short  distance  away,  we  could  not  see 
them,  so  dark  and  dense  was  the  snow  that  was 
whirled  along  by  the  wind ;  neither  could  we  see  any 
sign  of  a  camp  fire. 

In  a  few  moments  Emil  arose  and  said  he  would 
invite  them  to  our  camp.  Unless  they  were  well  pre- 
pared, it  would  be  impossible  for  man  or  beast  to 
survive  the  storm  until  morning,  as  the  cold  was 
growing  intense  outside.  As  he  was  preparing  to 
leave  the  tent,  two  of  our  party  asked  to  be  permitted 
to  accompany  him.  Emil  seemed  pleased ;  he  accept- 
ed, and  they  disappeared  in  the  storm.  After  about 
twenty  minutes  had  elapsed  they  reappeared,  fol- 
lowed by  twenty  of  the  bandit  band  leading  their 
horses.  They  told  us  afterwards  that  seven  had  be- 
come separated  from  them  and  were  probably  lost, 
in  the  storm.  Those  who  gathered  in  our  circle  were 
a  unique  and  motley  lot  of  half-wild  looking  crea- 
tures. The  moment  they  entered  the  circle  of  light 
they  became  suspicious  that  there  was  some  plot  to 


TEACHING  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

apture  them.  They  showed  their  alarm  until  Emil 
.ssured  them  they  were  at  liberty  to  go  any  time  they 
/ished,  and  showed  them  that  we  had  no  mode  of 
lefense  If  they  wished  to  attack  us.  This,  their  leader 
aid,  they  had  prepared  to  do  when  they  saw  us 
merge  from  the  ravine  before  the  storm  came  on. 
kfter  the  storm  came,  they  had  become  bewildered 
,nd  lost  their  way  so  they  did  not  know  where  their 
amp  was  located.  When  Emil  and  the  two  from  our 
»arty  had  found  them  they  were  huddled  together 
gainst  a  cliff  about  a  hundred  yards  down  stream, 
lie  leader  said  if  they  were  driven  out  they  would 
ertainly  perish,  Emil  assured  them  that  this  would 
.ot  happen. 

They  made  their  horses  secure  for  the  night 
mong  the  trees,  then  gathered  in  a  group  by  them- 
elves,  sat  down,  and  began  eating  dried  goat  meat 
nd  yak  butter  which  they  had  taken  from  their 
addle  pouches.  While  they  were  thus  occupied,  they 
ept  their  arms  near  at  hand  and  would  start  and 
sten  at  any  increased  sound.  They  talked  and  ges- 
iculated  freely.  Jast  told  us  they  were  wondering  at 
ur  equipment  and  the  light ;  why  the  wind  was  not 
lowing,  why  it  was  warm  within  the  circle,  and  why 
fie  horses  were  so  content.  One  of  the  party,  who 
fas  doing  most  of  the  talking,  had  heard  of  our 
riends  before.  He  was  telling  the  group  that  these 
teople  were  like  gods  and  could  destroy  them  (the 
andits)  in  an  instant  if  they  would.  Jast  also  said 
tiat  some  of  the  party  were  attempting  to  influence 
tie  others  to  take  everything  we  had  and  go  on,  as 
tiey  thought  it  was  a  plot  to  capture  them ;  but  that 
tiis  one  man  was  standing  firm  that  we  should  not 
e  molested.  He  was  telling  them  that  if  they  did 
arm  us  they  would  all  be  destroyed.  After  the  talk 

85 


THE  LIFE  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

had  gone  on  for  considerable  time,  eight  of  them 
arose  and  came  over  to  us  and  told  Jast  they  would 
not  stay ;  that  they  were  very  much  afraid  and  were 
going  to  try  and  go  to  their  camp,  as  it  was  located 
on  the  same  stream  but  a  few  miles  below.  They  had 
been  able  to  get  their  location  from  the  clump  of 
trees  where  we  were  encamped.  They  then  mounted 
their  horses  and  rode  away  down  stream. 

In  about  twenty  minutes  they  all  returned,  say- 
ing the  snow  had  fallen  so  deep  their  horses  could 
not  travel  and  face  the  storm,  which  was  the  heav- 
iest they  had  experienced  for  many  years.  Then  they 
began  making  themselves  comfortable  for  the  night. 

One  of  our  party  said,  "Well,  I  suppose  they  will 
be  more  comfortable  here,  even  if  they  are  afraid, 
than  they  would  be  out  in  the  storm/5  Jast  turned  to 
us  and  said,  "The  Father's  house  is  where  you  are 
abiding ;  if  you  are  within  that  house  and  do  there 
abide,  you  are  in  the  glad  spirit  of  the  Father.  Of 
what  avail  is  the  warmth  and  cheer  that  abides  with- 
in the  house  if  you  are  not  of  the  house,  or  know  not 
the  warmth  and  cheer  that  abides  therein?  You  may 
invite  those  that  remain  just  without  and  they  will 
not  enter,  for  they  know  not  where  you  abide.  These 
dear  ones  here,  while  they  feel  the  warmth,  will  not 
come  nearer  for  the  reason  that  they  have  always 
preyed  upon  their  fellow  men  and  they  can  not  un- 
derstand that  those  same  men  whom  they  have 
looked  upon  as  legitimate  prey  should  befriend  them 
without  some  reason  for  doing  so,  especially  as  they 
do  not  belong  to  their  band.  They  do  not  know  that 
within  the  snow  or  cold,  or  heaviest  storm,  the 
Father  abides ;  and  that  those  who  make  His  home 
their  home  and  therein  abide  can  not  be  harmed  by 
storm  or  wind  or  tide.  It  is  only  when  you  are  out  of 

86 


TEACHING  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

contact  with  God  that  the  winds,  the  storms,  and 
tides  sweep  over  you. 

"It  Is  when  one  can  stand  steadfastly  and  un- 
waveringly with  his  eyes  fixed  directly  on  God, 
knowing  and  seeing  no  other,  that  he  can  accomplish 
what  you  now  see.  Our  thought  is,  'I  stand  stead- 
fastly with  my  eyes  fixed  on  You,  O  Father ;  know- 
ing naught  but  You,  Father ;  and  I  see  naught  but 
God  in  all  things.  I  stand  firmly  in  the  Holy  Mount, 
knowing  naught  but  Your  Love,  Life,  and  Wisdom. 
Your  Divine  Spirit  pervades  me  always.  It  surrounds 
me  and  abounds  within  and  without  me  always.  I 
know,  Father,  that  this  is  not  for  me  alone,  but  it  is 
for  all  Thy  children.  I  know,  Father,  that  I  have 
naught  but  that  which  they  have  and  there  is  naught 
but  God  for  all.  I  thank  Thee,  Father.7 

"The  real  peace  may  be  found  even  in  the  heart 
of  the  storm ;  but  deep  in  the  heart  of  the  man  who 
has  found  himself,  is  the  true  calm.  On  the  contrary, 
man  may  be  in  the  remote  wilderness  alone  with  the 
twilight  and  the  vast  silence  of  nature,  and  yet  be 
torn  by  the  winds  of  passion  or  shaken  by  the  thun- 
ders of  fear. 

"Nature,  carelessly  observed,  seems  to  have  given 
brute  strength,  greed,  and  capacity  for  shedding 
weaker  animals'  blood  an  incomparable  advantage ; 
but  notice  the  following  simple  facts  that  few  have 
thought  about. 

"There  are  more  lambs  in  the  world  than  lions. 
That  is  not  an  accident.  Nature  is  not  a  blind,  blun- 
dering thing.  Nature  is  God  at  work,  and  God 
neither  wastes  material  nor  does  He  blunder  in  His 
building.  Does  it  not  strike  you  as  a  strange  thing 
that  in  the  melting  pot  of  Nature's  primal  forces  the 
lion  had  not  eaten  up  the  lamb  before  man  appeared 

87 


THE  LIFE  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

upon  the  scene?  The  lamb  has  literally  whipped  the 
lion  in  the  struggle  for  existence.  Nor  is  it  man's 
siding  with  the  lamb  against  the  lion  that  explains 
the  result.  In  all  probability  man  began  his  career  of 
slaughter  by  killing  the  docile  first.  It  is  certain  that 
he  kills  more  lambs  than  lions.  It  is  not  man  but 
Nature  that  pronounces  condemnation  of  lion's  kin. 
Reflect  a  moment  and  you  will  see  that  Nature  can 
not  give  distinctive  strength  in  opposite  directions  to 
the  same  animal.  The  lion  is  a  great  fighter  but  a 
slow  breeder.  All  the  strength  of  his  fine  body  goes 
to  fighting  form.  Having  young  is  detrimental  and 
becomes  the  incident  of  his  life.  The  lamb,  on  the 
other  hand,  is  not  a  fighter  and  therefore  is  weak.  The 
lamb  spends  no  energy  in  fighting  and  accordingly 
is  a  better  breeder.  Nature  acknowledges  that  in 
creating  the  lion  she  made  a  mistake.  She  is  correct- 
ing that  mistake.  The  lion  and  all  other  animals 
whose  instinct  is  to  kill  are  disappearing. 

"There  are  no  exceptions  to  this  sentence  of  ex- 
tinction pronounced  by  Nature's  immutable  law 
against  all  beings  of  the  preying  kind.  Nature  rules 
according  to  an  eternal  equity ;  and  by  the  very  law 
of  the  universe,  the  fighter  fights  a  losing  battle, 
always  has  and  always  will ;  whether  he  be  the  ani- 
mal or  the  animal  man,  in  the  forest  or  in  the  dty, 
now  and  forever.  The  lion  loses.  He  loses  when  he 
wins.  He  dies  when  he  kills.  He  is  by  the  very  nature 
of  things  eating  his  own  kind  when  he  rends  the 
warm  flesh  of  the  lamb  he  tore  from  the  flock.  When 
the  first  lion  struck  his  prey  with  his  mighty  paw 
and  growled  through  his  bloody  chops  the  delight 
he  felt,  he  was  singing,  not  the  death  of  the  helpless 
that  he  was  eating  but  the  funeral  hymn  of  his  own 
kind*  Savagery  is  a  poor  rallying  point.  Lions  do  not 

88 


TEACHING  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

herd.  Bears  do  not  go  in  flocks.  Savages  among  men 
form  small  groups  and  fight  each  other.  Wildness 
turns  on  Its  own  kind  among  beasts  or  men  and  is  a 
source  of  weakness. 

"In  the  analogy  of  things  wild  beasts  must  go. 
No  great  soldier  ever  really  conquered  anything.  His 
victories  are  all  illusions.  Soldiers'  empires,  if  they 
rest  on  nothing  more  substantial  than  the  sword, 
swiftly  fall  to  pieces.  In  the  end,  the  soldiers  must  re- 
pudiate force  and  resort  to  justice  and  reason,  or 
their  empires  crumble.  The  beast  of  prey,  whether  he 
is  brute  or  human,  is  solitary,  hopeless  and  helpless, 
irrevocably  doomed;  for  gentleness  is  the  real 
strength.  Gentleness  is  the  lion,  with  all  of  the  lion's 
attributes,  except  the  taste  for  blood ;  and  slowly  all 
life  is  coming  beneath  its  all-conquering  rule. 

"Man  is  made  or  unmade  by  himself.  In  the 
armory  of  thought  he  forges  the  weapons  by  which 
he  destroys  himself.  He  also  fashions  the  tools  with 
which  he  builds  for  himself  heavenly  mansions  of 
joy,  strength  and  peace.  By  the  right  choice  and  true 
application  of  thought,  man  ascends  to  the  Divine 
Perfection.  By  the  abuse  and  wrong  application  of 
thought,  he  descends  below  the  level  of  the  beast. 
Between  these  two  extremes  are  all  of  the  grades  of 
character,  and  man  is  their  maker  and  master. 

"These  bandits  are  the  remnants  of  a  once  great 
and  prosperous  people.  Their  forefathers  inhabited 
this  country  when  it  was  a  beautiful,  thriving,  indus- 
trial empire.  They  knew  the  sciences  and  arts.  They 
also  knew  their  own  origin  and  power,  and  they  wor- 
shipped that  origin  and  power  only.  There  came  a 
time  when  they  began  to  look  to  the  body  for  pleas- 
ure, and  in  time  the  body  failed  them.  Then  a  great 
cataclysm  swept  over  the  land,  devastating  it  and 

89 


THE  LIFE  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

leaving  only  a  few  scattered  people  on  the  higher 
ground.  These  developed  into  communities  and  be- 
came the  larger  races  of  Europe. 

"The  region  where  we  are  and  that  of  the  Gobi 
was  cut  off  and  raised  bodily  until  nothing  grew.  The 
people  were  so  nearly  destroyed  that  there  were  only 
a  few  isolated  communities  and  at  times  only  one  or 
two  families  left.  These  gathered  in  bands  and  are 
the  ancestors  of  the  present  people.  They  cannot 
prosper,  as  they  are  continually  at  war  with  each 
other.  While  their  history  and  origin  have  been  for- 
gotten, their  religion  and  legends  can  be  traced  to 
the  one  source.  Wherever  you  find  them  you  will 
find  some  of  the  fundamentals  alike,  although  their 
forms  differ  widely." 

Here  Jast  said  that  he  feared  he  had  already 
weaned  us,  as  all  our  friends  were  fast  asleep.  We 
looked  in  the  direction  of  the  bandits,  and  sure 
enough  they  were  all  asleep.  They,  as  well  as  we,  had 
forgotten  the  storm,  which  was  still  unabated.  We 
went  into  the  tent  and  retired,  again  thankful  to  our 
great  friends. 

When  we  awoke  the  next  morning,  the  sun  was 
shining  and  the  whole  camp  was  astir.  We  dressed 
hastily  and  went  out  to  find  that  the  company,  ban- 
dits and  -all,  were  waiting  for  us.  At  breakfast  we 
were  told  that  it  had  been  arranged  we  should  travel 
as  far  as  the  bandits9  camp  together,  as  it  would  be 
easier  to  break  trail  when  we  were  all  together.  The 
bandits  seemed  pleased  at  the  prospect,  but ,  I  can 
not  say  we  were,  for  we  were  told  that  there  were 
about  one  hundred  and  fifty  at  their  camp.  By  the 
time  we  had  finished  breakfast  all  vestige  of  the 
storm  had  passed ;  so  we  broke  camp  and  started  out 
with  the  bandits  and  their  horses  to  break  trail, 

9® 


TEACHING  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

leaving  the  others  to  follow  with  the  camp  equip- 
ment. 

Although  the  bandits'  camp  was  not  over  twelve 
miles  down  the  river,  we  did  not  reach  there  until 
after  midday,  when  we  were  only  too  pleased  to  stop 
for  a  little  rest.  We  found  the  camp  very  comfort- 
able, with  ample  room  to  accommodate  all  our 
party.  After  lunch  it  was  decided  that  we  could  make 
better  headway  if  we  waited  a  day  or  two  to  allow 
the  new  snow  that  had  fallen  to  settle,  as  we  would 
be  obliged  to  cross  a  divide  of  about  fourteen  thou- 
sand feet  elevation  the  next  day.  The  weather  did 
not  prove  to  be  as  warm  as  was  expected,  so  our 
stay  was  prolonged  for  four  days.  The  whole  village 
treated  us  with  the  greatest  respect,  and  did  every- 
thing in  their  power  to  make  our  stay  comfortable. 

When  %ve  were  leaving,  two  of  the  men  asked  if 
they  could  join  our  party.  As  we  were  expecting  to 
recruit  a  number  of  helpers  in  the  next  large  village, 
about  seventy  miles  farther  on,  we  gladly  accepted 
them  and  they  were  with  us  until  we  returned  that 
fall 

When  we  left  the  village,  nearly  one-half  of  the 
population  accompanied  us  to  the  summit  of  the 
high  divide  in  order  to  assist  in  breaking  trail 
through  the  deep  snow,  and  we  were  very  thankful 
for  their  kindly  efforts,  as  it  proved  a  very  difficult 
ascent.  At  the  summit  we  bade  farewell  to  our  bandit 
friends  and  went  on  to  the  appointed  meeting  place, 
arriving  there  May  28,  three  days  after  the  arrival 
of  the  friends  we  had  made  the  appointment  with 
the  fall  before. 


CHAPTER  X 

AFTER  resting  for  a  week  and  reassembling 
our  outfit,  the  combined  expedition  set  out  for 
the  ancient  city  of  the  Uigurs,  where  we  ar- 
rived June  30,  Here  we  set  to  work  Immediately* 
and  when  the  first  pit  was  down  to  a  depth  of  fifty 
feet  we  encountered  the  walls  of  an  ancient  building. 
When  we  had  proceeded  to  a  depth  of  a  little  more 
than  ninety  feet,  we  broke  into  a  large  room  where 
there  were  a  number  of  gold;  silver,  bronze,  and  clay 
statues,  all  beautifully  wrought.  After  the  work  ^  had 
progressed  far  enough  to  prove  beyond  a  question  of 
doubt  that  this  had  once  been  a,  very  large  city,  we 
went  on  to  the  second  location.  Here  we  went  down 
about  forty  feet  before  we  came  upon  anything  that 
could  be  called  definite  proof  of  a  former  civilization. 
Again  we -did  enough  work  to  prove  that  we  were  in 
the  ruins  of  a  large  ancient  city. 

We  removed  to  a  third  location,  where  we  ex- 
pected to  find  evidence  that  would  prove  this  the 
oldest  and  largest  of  the  three  cities. 

In  order  to  conserve  time  and  resources  we  had 
organized  our  forces  into  four  parties.  Three  of 
these  parties  were  made  up  of  a  leader  and  six 
assistants.  This  gave  seven  men  to  each  party.  To  this 
combined  force  was  assigned  all  the  excavation  work 
and  Its  management,  each  party  being  assigned  eight 
hours  out  of  the  twenty-four.  The  fourth  party,  con- 
sisting of  the  remainder  of  the  personnel  of  the  ex- 
pedition, was  assigned  the  duties  of  the  carnp.  I  was 
ia  the  party  of  which  our  Chief  was  the  leader*  We 
were  assigned  the  eight  hours  from  midnight  until 
eight  in  the  morning. 

9* 


OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

After  we  had  completed  the  discovery  of  the  first 
pit  and  had  gained  access  to  four  of  the  underground 
chambers  or  rooms,  we  cleared  away  enough  of  the 
debris  to  show  beyond  a  question  of  doubt  that  this 
was  the  oldest  and  largest  city  of  the  three,  and  that 
it  was  rich  in  treasure. 

One  morning  the  party  which  relieved  our 
Chiefs  party  reported  that  there 'were  horsemen 
approaching  our  camp  from  the  north.  When  we 
reached  the  surface  we  found  they  were  headed  in 
our  direction,  and  it  looked  as  though  they  were  an- 
other bandit  band,  since  they  were  evidently  follow- 
ing the  trail  we  had  made  on  our  way  there.  As  we 
stood  looking,  Jast  came  up  and  said,  "They  are  a 
party  of  bandits  who  are  determined  to  loot  the 
camp,  but  I  do  not  think  we  need  fear.5*  We  waited 
for  them  to  approach  and  they  came  on  to  within 
five  hundred  yards  of  our  camp,  then  halted. 

After  a  short  interval  two  of  the  men  rode  up 
and  after  exchanging  greetings  asked  what  we  were 
doing  there.  They  were  told  we  were  attempting 
to  find  a  ruined  city.  To  this  they  replied  they  did 
not  believe  a  word  of  what  we  said.  They  suspected 
we  were  looking  for  gold  and  they  had  come  to  take 
our  equipment  and  supplies  from  us.  We  asked  if 
they  were  government  soldiers,  to  which  they  replied 
they  did  not  recognize  any  government,  as  fhe 
strongest  party  was  the  one  that  won  in  that  coun- 
try. As  they  saw  no  evidence  of  firearms,  I  believe 
they  came  to  the  conclusion  that  there  must  be  a 
larger  force  than  was  evidenced  by  what  they  could 
see.  They  returned  to  their  band  to  talk  over  the 
situation. 

After  a  time  the  two  came  back  and  told  us  that 
if  we  submitted  peacefully  they  would  not  harm  any 

93 


THE  LIFE  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

of  us,  but  If  we  did  not  they  would  advance  and 
shoot  everyone  who  showed  resistance.  We  were 
given  ten  minutes  to  decide  and  after  that  time  they 
would  advance  without  further  preliminaries.  To  this 
Jast  replied  that  we  would  neither  resist  nor  sur- 
render. This  seemed  to  anger  them  and,  wheeling 
their  horses,  they  started  back  toward  the  band,  wav- 
ing their  arms.  Then  the  whole  band  came  toward 
us  at  full  gallop.  I  confess  that  I  was  badly  fright- 
ened, but  almost  instantly  we  seemed  to  be  surround- 
ed by  a  number  of  shadowy  forms  on  horseback, 
galloping  around  us.  Then  these  forms  became  more 
lifelike  and  increased  in  numbers.  Evidently  our 
visitors  had  seen  what  we  were  witnessing,  for  their 
horses  were  either  reined  in  quickly,  or  stopped  of 
their  own  accord  as  they  began  to  rear  and  plunge 
and  get  beyond  control  of  their  riders.  In  a  moment 
there  was  wild  confusion  among  the  band,  which 
numbered  about  seventy-five  horsemen.  The  horses 
began  plunging  right  and  left,  beyond  all  control  of 
the  riders  and  this  ended  in  a  wild  retreat,  with  our 
phantom  horsemen,  as  we  called  them,  in  close  pur- 
suit. 

After  the  excitement  was  over,  our  Chief  and 
two  of  the  party,  including  myself,  walked  out  to 
where  the  main  band  had  halted  and  could  find  no 
tracks  except  those  made  by  the  robbers  themselves. 
We  were  very  much  mystified  at  this  since  the  relief 
had  looked  as  real  to  us  as  did  the  bandits,  and  the 
rescuers  had  seemed  to  have  come  from  all  sides.  We 
fully  expected  to  find  the  tracks  of  their  horses  in 
the  sand,  as  well  as  the  tracks  of  the  horses  the  ban- 
dits were  riding. 

When  we  returned,  Jast  said,  "The  phantom 
horsemen,  as  you  call  them,  were  only  pictures,  made 

94 


TEACHING  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

so  real  that  you,  as  well  as  the  bandits,  could  see 
them.  In  a  word  they  were  the  pictures  of  other 
occurrences  that  we  were  able  to  produce  in  so  life- 
like a  manner  that  they  could  not  be  distinguished 
from  the  real  occurrence.  We  are  able  to  produce 
them  for  our  own  protection  as  well  as  for  that  of 
others,  and  no  one  has  been  harmed.  Where  a  defi- 
nite purpose  is  served,  there  is  no  harm  in  the  out- 
come. A  doubt  had  arisen  in  the  minds  of  the  ban- 
dits. It  was  not  logical  that  an  expedition  like  this 
would  venture  so  far  away  without  some  protection, 
and  we  were  able  to  take  advantage  of  this  to  fright- 
en them.  They  are  very  superstitious  and  always  on 
the  lookout  for  trickery.  That  type  is  the  most  sus- 
ceptible to  fear,  and  they  saw  just  what  they  ex- 
pected to  find.  If  we  had  not  used  this  method,  we 
should  in  all  probability  have  been  obliged  to  destroy 
a  number  of  the  band  before  they  would  have  left 
us  in  peace.  As  it  is  we  shall  hear  no  more  of  them." 
We  were  not  molested  again. 

After  we  had  accomplished  sufficient  work  to 
convince  us  that  these  three  cities  existed,  it  was 
suggested  that  we  should  fill  all  the  pits,  in  order  to 
protect  them  from  any  roving  band  that  might  dis- 
cover the  work,  as  such  a  discovery  would  lead  to 
wholesale  plundering  for  the  treasure  alone.  There 
are  legends  among  nearly  all  these  bands  that  these 
great  cities  exist  and  that  they  contain  hoards  of 
gold.  As  we  finished  work,  each  pit  was  filled,  so  as 
to  leave  as  little  trace  as  possible ;  and  the  first  storm 
would  remove  any  trace  which  we  had  left.  The  sand 
is  continually  shifting  in  this  country,  and  this  alone 
makes  it  very  difficult  to  locate  any  of  these  ruins. 
It  would  have  been  impossible  for  us  to  discover  any 
of  the  locations  without  the  assistance  of  our  friends. 


95 


THE  LIFE  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

We  were  told  that  similar  ruins  extend  well  into 
Southern  Siberia. 

There  is  unmistakable  evidence  that  a  vast  popu- 
lation had  flourished  here  and  that  they  had  reached 
a  high  state  of  civilization.  There  is  also  unlimited 
proof  that  these  people  understood  agriculture,  min- 
ing, textiles  and  their  allied  industries,  reading, 
writing,  and  all  the  sciences.  It  is  very  evident  that 
the  history  of  these  people  is  the  history  of  the  Aryan 
race. 

While  seated  at  the  table  the  afternoon  of  our 
last  day,  one  of  the  party  asked  Exnil  whether  the 
history  of  this  great  race  could  be  traced  and  writ- 
ten. He  answered  that  it  could,  that  the  city  beneath 
the  site  of  our  camp  contained  the  absolute  proof  in 
written  records,  which,  when  found  and  translated, 
would  give  a  concurrent  and  direct  history  of  this 
people. 

Here  the  conversation  was  interrupted  by  a  man 
appearing  at  the  door  of  the  tent  and  asking  if  he 
could  come  in.  Emil,  Jast,  and  Ghander  Sen  arose 
and  hurried  to  the  entrance  to  meet  him.  By  the 
greetings  extended  we  saw  they  were  very  well  ac- 
quainted, and  our  Chief  arose  and  joined  them.  At 
the  door  of  the  tent  we  saw  Mm  stop  and  stare  for 
a  moment ;  then  he  walked  quickly  out  of  the  door 
with  both  hands  extended,  saying,  "Well,  well,  this 
is  indeed  a  surprise/5  A  medley  of  voices  arose,  as 
both  men  and  women  began  to  exchange  greetings 
with  him  and  the  three  that  had  stepped  through 
the  door  after  him.  At  this,  all  seated  at  the  table 
arose  and  crowded  outside,  where  we  found  a  group 
df  fourteen  newcomers.  The  party  included  EmiPs 
riiother,  our  hostess,  from  the  village  of  our  former 
winter  quarters)  the  beautiful  lady  who  had  presided 

96 


TEACHING  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

at  the  banquet  that  we  attended  In  EmiTs  home,  and 
EmiTs  son  and  daughter.  In  all  they  were  a  merry 
crowd  and  it  brought  back  remembrances  of  gather- 
ings of  former  days. 

The  surprise  was  complete  and  we  showed  it,  but 
the  most  complete  surprise  was  shown  by  the  friends 
who  had  joined  us  on  this  expedition.  As  we  looked 
at  them,  we  knew  that  their  curiosity  was  getting  be- 
yond all  bounds.  They  had  not  seen  these  appear- 
ances and  disappearances  as  we  had?  and  during  the 
press  of  the  expedition  work  we  had  been  so  en- 
grossed that  we  had  neglected  to  tell  them  of  any- 
thing but  fragmentary  incidents.  Coming,  as  this 
had,  virtuaEy  from  a  clear  sky,  it  left  them  absolute- 
ly nonplussed.  Of  course  we  were  heartily  enjoying 
this  at  their  expense. 

After  introductions  and  greetings  had  been  ex- 
tended all  around,  the  man  who  had  charge  of  the 
camp  and  equipment  sought  Emil  and  our  Chief. 
With  every  evidence  of  abject  helplessness,  he  said, 
"How  am  I  going  to  feed  all  these  people?  Our  sup- 
plies have  not  yet  arrived  and  we  have  barely  enough 
provisions  left  for  ourselves  for  this  and  the  morning 
meal,  since  we  have  made  every  arrangement  to  start 
on  our  return  trip."  While  they  were  conversing  they 
had  drawn  together  and  %  the  leader  of  the  combined 
expedition  had  overheard  a  part  of  the  conversation. 
He  stepped  over  and  joined  them.  As  he  did  so,  I 
could  hear  him  ask,  "Where  in  the  name  of  heaven 
did  all  these  people  come  from?35  Our  Chief  looked 
at  him  with  a  smile  and  said,  "You  have  just  hit  it, 
Ray,  they  did  come  direct  from  heaven.  Sec,  there 
are  no  conveyances."  Ray  answered,  "But  the  thing 
that  puzzles  me  most  is,  they  don't  seem  to  have, any 
wings.  As  they  do  not  have  wings,  we  should  have 

97 


THE  LIFE  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

heard  the  thud  when  they  landed  in  the  sand,  espe- 
cially as  there  are  so  many  of  them ;  but  we  did  not 
even  hear  that.  So  we  are  going  to  decide  for  the 
time  that  your  suggestion  is  right  and  perfectly 
logical/9 

Emil  then  turned  to  the  company  and  said  he 
would  be  obliged,  in  order  to  allay  the  fears  of  the 
steward,  to  admonish  the  visitors  for  not  bringing 
along  their  provisions.  At  this  the  steward  seemed 
greatly  embarrassed  and  said  he  did  not  think  of 
putting  it  quite  so  bluntly,  but  nevertheless  the  fact 
still  remained  that  there  certainly  were  not  enough 
edibles  to  go  around.  Here  the  visitors  joined  in  a 
merry  laugh,  which  seemed  to  embarrass  him  still 
more.  Then  Emil's  mother  said  there  was  no  need 
for  embarrassment  or  inconvenience.  Our  hostess 
and  the  beautiful  lady  joined  in  saying  they  would 
gladly  take  charge  and  be  responsible  for  the  supper, 
as  they  fully  expected  to  share  the  meal  with  us.  This 
relieved  the  steward  and  he  quickly  accepted  the 
preferred  service. 

The  afternoon  was  now  well  advanced.  It  was 
one  of  those  days  in  the  Gobi  when  the  weather 
fairly  fawns  upon  the  earth  for  one  moment,  then  in 
the  next  instant  may  transform  the  scene  into  an 
inferno  of  relentless  fury.  Every  available  canvas  was 
secured  and  spread  upon  the  sand,  just  outside  the 
circle  of  the  camp.  To  an  outsider,  the  scene  would 
have  had  the  appearance  of  a  merry  picnic  party, 
which  indeed  it  was.  When  the  canvas  was  all 
spread,  the  containers,  which  were  used  both  for 
cooking  and  serving  the  camp  meals,  were  brought 
out  with  their  contents  and  placed  on  the  canvas. 
Then  the  whole  company  gathered  around. 

We  could  still  see  evidences  of  wonder  and  per- 

98 


TEACHING  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

plexity  on  the  faces  of  those  who  had  lately  joined 
the  party.  Ray,  the  leader,  looked  at  the  containers, 
and  said  that  if  he  saw  rightly  the  amount  of  food 
the  containers  held,  and  if  that  amount  could  be 
stretched  sufficiently  to  feed  that  hungry  mob,  he 
was  going  to  keep  his  eyes  open  for  the  performance 
of  a  miracle.  One  of  our  party  said,  "You  better 
keep  your  eyes  wide  open,  for  that  is  just  what  you 
are  going  to  see."  Our  Chief  said,  "That  is  twice  you 
have  guessed  right  today,  Ray."  At  this  the  three 
ladies  began  serving  from  the  containers.  As  each 
plate  was  served,  it  was  passed  on  and  an  empty 
plate  was  received  for  the  full  one  until  all  had  been 
served  most  generously.  As  the  serving  progressed, 
we  could  see  that  Ray  was  getting  more  restless; 
aud  when  his  plate  came  to  him  he  passed  it  on, 
remarking  that  he  could  get  along  with  a  much  less 
liberal  helping.  Our  hostess  assured  him  that  he  need 
not  fear,  as  there  would  be  a  plentiful  supply  for  all 

After  all  had  been  served  bountifully,  he  again 
looked  at  the  containers.  When  he  saw  that  the  con- 
tents had  not  been  diminished,  he  arose  and  said, 
"At  the  risk  of  being  impolite,  ill-mannered,  and  a 
bounder,  I  am  going  to  ask  if  I  may  sit  by  you  three 
ladies,  as  I  fully  acknowledge  my  curiosity  has  so 
deliberately  taken  the  upper  hand  that  I  can  not 
eat  a  bite."  The  ladies  said  they  would  look  upon 
it  as  an  act  of  courtesy  if  he  wished  to  sit  by  them. 
Whereupon  he  walked  over  and  sat  down  on  the 
edge  of  the  canvas,  between  EmiFs  mother  and  the 
beautiful  lady. 

When  he  was  seated,  someone  asked  for  bread. 
There  was  but  one  piece  remaining  on  the  box  lid 
that  served  in  place  of  a  tray.  The  beautiful  lady 
held  out  her  hands  and  almost  instantly  there  was  a 

99 


THE  UFE  OF  THE  'MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

large  loaf  of  bread  in  them.  This  she  passed  to  our 
hostess,  who  began  cutting  it,  preparatory  to  serving. 
At  this  the  leader  arose  and  asked  if  they  would 
kindly  permit  him  to  see  the  loaf  as  it  was.  The  loaf 
was  passed  to  him,  and  after  examining  it  critically 
for  a  moment  he  passed  it  back.  We  could  see  that 
he  was  very  much  agitated.  He  walked  away  a  few 
steps,  then  returned,  and  addressing  himself  directly 
to  the  lady,  said,  "I  do  not  wish  to  seem  impertinent, 
but  this  has  muddled  my  thoughts  to  such  an  extent 
that  I  can  not  refrain  from  asking  questions.9*  She 
bowed  and  said  he  was  at  liberty  to  ask  any  questions 
we  wished.  He  said,  "Do  you  mean  to  tell  me  that 
you  are  able  to  set  aside  all  the  known  natural  laws, 
— at  least  those  that  we  know  of — without  the  least 
exertion  and  bring  forth  bread  from  an  unseen  or 
invisible  supply?"  The  lady  replied,  "To  us  the  sup- 
ply is  not  unseen;  it  is  always  visible.55  Then  it  was 
perceived  that  as  our  hostess  cut  and  served  the  loaf 
It  did  not  diminish. 

He  became  more  calm,  again  took  his  place,  and 
the  lady  continued:  "If  you  could  only  see  that  the 
tragedy  of  Jesus5  life  ended  with  the  crucifixion,  that 
the  joy  of  the  Christ  life  began  with  the  resurrection, 
and  that  the  goal  of  every  life  should  be  the  resur- 
rection rather  than  the  crucifixion.  In  this  way  aE 
may  follow  him  into  the  more  abundant  life  of  the 
Christ  in  them.  Can  you  think  of  a  more  joyous  and 
abundant  life  than  to  be  one  with  this  Mighty  Power, 
this  power  of  the  Christ  within?  It  is  here  you  may 
know  that  you  were  created  to  have  dominion  over 
every  form,  thought,  word  or  condition.  In  living  this 
life,  which  is  the  fulfillment  of  every  need,  you  will 
find  that  you  are  living  an  exact,  scientific  life. 

"Jesus  increased  the  few  loaves  and  fishes  the 

100 


TEACHING  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

little  lad  had,  until  lie  was  able  to  supply  ample  for 
the  multitude.  You  will  observe  that  he  bade  them 
sit  down  in  an  orderly  expectant  attitude,  ready  to 
receive  the  increased  supply  by  fulfilling  the  law*  If 
you  are  to  find  joy  and  satisfaction  in  the  life  of 
Jesus,  you  must  fulfill  the  law  of  his  life  by  acting  in 
harmony  with  his  ideals.  You  can  not  stand  and 
worry  as  to  how  you  are  to  be  fed.  If  Jesus  had 
allowed  this,  the  multitude  never  would  have  been 
satisfied.  Instead,  He  quietly  blessed  and  gave  thanks 
for  that  which  he  had  and  the  supply  was  increased 
in  sufficient  measure  to  meet  every  need. 

"Living  did  not  become  a  difficult  problem  until 
man  disobeyed  and  refused  to  listen  to  the  Inner 
Voice.  When  he  returns  and  again  learns  to  listen  to 
that  Inner  Voice  he  will  cease  to  labor  for  the 
means  of  a  living,  but  he  will  work  for  the  joy  of 
creating.  He  will  enter  into  the  joy  of  creating,  and 
he  will  create  under  the  law  of  the  Lord,  or  Word 
of  God.  Through  His  Word  he  will  find  that  he  can 
move  upon  the  all-loving  and  all-enfolding  substance 
of  God,  and  bring  into  visibility  every  ideal  he  holds 
in  thought.  It  was  in  this  way,  step  by  step,  that 
Jesus  mounted  to  the  heights  and  proved  the  suprem- 
acy of  the  Christ  in  Him  over  the  limited  concept 
of  mortal  thought.  When  this  is  realized,  work  be- 
comes a  joyous  quality  of  one's  being.  Jesus  proved 
that  the  truly  spiritual  life  is  the  only  joyous  life. 
He  became  clothed  with  dignity  and  glory  because 
of  his  victory ;  yet  that  victory  left  him  as  free  as  a 
little  child.  Although  the  world  is  not  wholly  awake 
to  its  desire,  it  is  this  desire  of  joy  and  great  blessing 
that  it  is  seeking.  Man  may  seek  satisfaction  in  the 
pursuit  of  personal  things,  unmindful  of  the  law  that 
says  he  shall  lose  that  which  he  seeks  for  selfish  gain. 

101 


THE  LIFE  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

But  through  the  losing  he  soon  finds  that  the  fall  of 
the  personal  but  marks  the  ascent  of  the  spiritual.  He 
realizes  that  man's  extremity  is  God's  opportunity. 

"You  must  know  that  you  are  entitled  to  every 
good  and  perfect  gift  of  God,  and  you  must  prepare 
to  receive  those  gifts  through  the  knowledge  of  God 
as  y©ur  Divine  Nature.  If  you  separate  yourself  from 
God  in  thought,  you  will  also  separate  yourself  from 
him  in  manifestation.  In  order  to  enter  fully  into  the 
joy  of  life,  you  must  seek  life  and  joy,  for  the  full- 
ness and  joy  that  that  life  gives  to  all  humanity. 

"The  laws  for  the  establishment  of  heaven  here 
on  earth,  which  Jesus  taught  and  which  you  have 
seen  applied  in  a  very  small  measure,  are  exact  and 
scientific.  Man,  being  the  son  and  true ^  likeness  of 
God,  contains  within  himself  the  true  spirit  of  God, 
his  Father.  He  can  discern  and  use  the  laws  of  his 
creative  parent  and  bring  them  into  full  operation  in 
his  world  of  affairs,  if  he  only  will"  Then  she  said 
they  would  be  pleased  to  answer  any  questions  he 
might  like  to  ask. 

Ray  said  he  did  not  have  any  questions  to  ask, 
for  he  had  been  too  deeply  stirred  to  want  to  ask 
questions.  He  just  wanted  to  think.  He  said  he  had 
some  things  he  wanted  to  say  and  he  hoped  they 
would  not  take  offense,  for  offense  was  not  intended 
in  any  way.  He  continued,  "We  came  here,  as  we 
supposed,  to  find  the  remains  of  a  people  long  since 
dead  and  gone.  Instead,  we  find  a  people  living  a 
far  more  wonderful  and  active  life  than  can  be  com- 
prehended. If  this  thing  that  we  have  seen  could 
be  heralded  abroad,  you  would  have  the  whole  world 
bowing  at  your  feet."  The  three  ladies  said  they  did 
not  wish  the  world  to  bow  at  their  feet,  but  they 
longed  to  see  all  mankind  bowing  at  God's  feet.  They 


102 


TEACHING  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

went  on  to  say  that  mankind  already  had  too  many 
idols.  The  ideal  was  the  thing  really  needed. 

Here  the  visitors,  with  the  exception  of  the  one 
who  had  called  at  the  door  of  the  tent,  arose,  saying 
they  must  be  on  their  way.  With  hearty  handshakes 
and  Godspeed  and  invitations  to  visit  them  at  any 
time,  they  disappeared  as  suddenly  as  they  had 
come,  leaving  Ray  and  his  party  staring  at  the  place 
where  they  had  stood.  After  a  moment  he  turned  to 
the  man  who  had  remained,  and  asked  his  name. 
He  was  told  that  it  was  Bagget  Irand. 

Then  Ray  said  to  him,  "Do  you  mean  to  say  that 
you  are  able  to  come  and  go  at  will,  without  any 
visible  means  of  conveyance,  as  we  have  just  seen, 
defying  every  known  law  of  gravity  or  physics?" 

Bagget  Irand  answered,  "We  do  not  defy  any 
law,  neither  do  we  harm  a  single  law  of  man  or  God. 
We  co-operate  with,  and  work  according  to,  all  laws, 
both  of  Nature  and  God.  The  means  of  locomotion 
which  we  use,  although  invisible  to  you,  are  perfectly 
visible  to  us.  The  trouble  is  you  do  not  see  them; 
consequently  you  do  not  believe.  We  see,  believe,  and 
know,  and  we  are  able  to  utilize  them.  When  you 
open  your  understanding  to  know  and  see  and  use 
them,  you  will  soon  find  that  the  law  which  we  use 
is  definite  and  far  more  capable  of  being  put  to 
greater  uses  for  mankind  than  the  limited  laws  which 
you  see  and  use.  Some  day  you  will  find  that  you 
have  only  touched  the  surface  of  man's  possibilities. 
We  are  always  pleased  to  assist  you  in  any  way  we 


can." 


Chander  Sen  said  that  this  friend  had  come  to 
invite  us  to  return  to  our  outfitting  point  by  way  of 
his  village,  as  the  trail  was  shorter  and  the  distance 
could  be  made  with  one  day  less  travel  at  this  time 

103 


TBtE  UFE  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

of  the  year.  This  invitation  was  readily  accepted^ 
and  Bagget  Irand  said  he  would  return  with  us.  It 
developed  later  that  he  was  a  descendant  of  the  once 
prosperous  people  that  had  inhabited  the  Gobi 
region. 


XI 

WE  HAD  finished  the  work  mapped  out  for 
the  combined  expedition,  and  were  prepared 
for  an  early  morning  start  for  our  base,  where 
the  company  would  separate  and  all  except  a  party 
of  eleven  would  return  to  their  respective  homes. 
Four  of  the  party,  myself  included,  had  decided  to 
accept  the  invitation  of  our  friends  to  return  to  the 
village  of  the  Temple  of  the  Tau  Cross,  our  former 
winter  quarters. 

As  we  stood  watching  the  sunset,  on  the  eve  of 
our  departure,  one  of  the  party  said  that  he  had 
begun  to  wonder  how  old  civilization  and  religion 
really  were  and  whether  the  two  had  really  come 
hand-in-hand  down  the  long  ages  of  time.  Jast 
replied,  "That  depends  upon  what  you  mean  by  reli- 
gion. If  by  the  use  of  the  word,  'religion*  you  mean 
creed,  dogma  or  sect,  or  perhaps  superstition,  it  is 
very  young  and  does  not  antedate  twenty  thousand 
years.  But  if  by  the  word  you  mean  a  reverence  for 
the  true  philosophy  of  life,  a  true  reverence  for  life 
itself,  thus  a  true  reverence  for  the  sublime  purity  of 
God,  of  the  great  Creative  Cause,  then  you  may 
trace  this  back  beyond  all  history,  all  mythology,  all 
allegory,  to  the  time  of  man's  first  advent  upon  earth, 
before  kings,  emperors,  or  man-made  rule  held  sway. 
In  the  heart  of  the  first  man  there  burned  or  shone 
forth  the  greatest  reverence  for  the  source  of  all  life 
and  the  beauty  of  that  life ;  the  beauty  and  rever- 
ence of  that  pure  soul  shines  undimmed  through  the 
long  ages  and  so  it  will  shine  on  undimmed  through 
all  eternity. 

"When  man  first  took  up  life,  he  knew  full  well 

105 


THE  LIFE  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

the  source.  He  had  the  deepest  reverence  for  that 
source  and  that  reverence  you  now  know  as  the 
Christ.  But  as  we  come  on  down  the  dim  corridors  of 
time,  we  find  them  divided  into  the  innumerable 
sects,  creeds,  and  dogmas  until  those  corridors  are 
divided  into  such  a  network  that  they  present  a  veil 
of  disbelief  and  superstition.  Who,  may  I  ask,  divided 
them— did  God  or  man?  Who  is  responsible  for  the 
great  vortex  of  sin  and  inharmony  this  division  has 
caused?  Will  you  pause  for  a  moment  and  think 
deeply,  then  ask  yourselves,  is  it  God  or  man  that  ^is 
responsible?  Then  think,  does  God  sit  somewhere  in 
the  sky  looking  down  on  this  great  web,  altering  a 
condition  here  or  a  condition  there,  interfering  here 
or  smoothing  out  a  life  there,  praising  one  or  con- 
demning another,  holding  up  the  hands  of  one  while 
he  tramples  the  other?  No,  if  there  be  a  true  giver 
of  life,  he  must  be  Omnipotent,  Omnipresent,  Om- 
niscient, far  above,  around,  and  in  all,  pouring  out 
his  life  to  all,  through  all  and  above  all,  else  he  is 
not  a  true  giver  of  all  life.  Thus  you  may  differen- 
tiate this  idea  into  the  innumerable  varieties  of  form, 
but  when  you  reach  the  final  one,  you  will  find  that 
you  reach  tht  one  at  the  beginning  also ;  and  the  two 
become  a  cycle  with  no  beginning  and  no  end.  Were 
this  not  so,  there  could  be  no  basis,  no  hypothesis,  no 
truth." 

Here  some  one  asked,  "Do  you  attempt  to  over- 
come death?59  The  answer  was,  "Oh,  no,  we  rise 
up  over  death  by  letting  life  express  to  its  absolute 
fullness.  Thus,  we  do  not  know  even  what  death  is. 
To  us  there  is  nothing  but  more  abundant  life.  The 
great  error  of  the  majority  is,  they  attempt  to  hide 
their  religion  behind  some  veil  or  secret  instead  of 

106 


TEACHING  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

throwing  It  open  to  the  broad  expanse  of  God's  pure 
sunlight.55 

Some  one  of  the  party  asked  whether  Jesus  abode 
with  them,  meaning  Jast's  people.  He  replied,  "No, 
Jesus  does  not  live  with  us.  He  is  only  drawn  to  us 
by  the  thoughts  we  have  in  common,  the  same  as  he 
is  drawn  to  all  by  the  thoughts  they  have  in  com- 
mon. Jesus  abides  only  to  be  of  service,  as  all  great 
souls  do." 

He  went  on  to  say,  "It  was  while  sojourning  in 
Northern  Arabia  that  Jesus  had  access  to  the  library 
that  had  been  collected  from  India,  Persia,  and  the 
Trans-Himalayan  region.  Here  Jesus  first  contacted 
the  secret  teachings  of  the  Brotherhood.  These  teach- 
ings only  served  to  drive  home  more  firmly  the  con* 
viction  already  forming,  that  the  true  mystery  of  life 
was  God  expressed  through  the  Christ  in  the  individ- 
ual. He  saw  that  in  order  to  express  this  fully,  he 
must  withdraw  from  all  forms  of  worship,  and  wor- 
ship God  expressing  through  the  individual,  and  God 
alone.  He  saw  that  in  order  to  demonstrate  this  fully 
he  would  be  obliged  to  withdraw  from  those  who 
had  taught  him,  even  though  by  withdrawing  he 
should  incur  their  displeasure.  This  did  not  deter 
him  for  a  moment,  so  steadfast  was  he  in  his  devo- 
tion to  his  cause  and  the  great  service  he  saw  he 
could  render  to  the  world  by  that  devotion. 

"He  saw  that  if  man  ever  arose  to  the  lofty  power 
of  that  mighty  Indwelling  Presence;  if  a  mighty 
Son  of  God,  one  in  whom  the  Divine  Wisdom  abode 
in  fullest  measure ;  one  rich  in  the  outpouring  rich- 
ness of  all  of  God's  treasures,  the  fountain  of  the  out- 
pouring waters  of  life,  the  Lord,  or  law  of  compas- 
sion and  wisdom;  was  actually  to  take  flesh  upon 
earth,  he  must  come  forth  and  claim  these  possess- 

107 


THE  LIFE  OF  THE  MASTERS  -OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

Ions:  then  with  pure  motive  he  must  live  the  life  and 
he  would  bring  forth  that  life,  to  which  ^manlfest 
Presence  the  name  of  the  Christ  has  been  given. 

aHe  stood  forth  and  boldly  proclaimed  that  the 
Christ  that  abode  in  him,  abode  in  all;  that  the 
celestial  voice  that  proclaimed  him  the  Beloved -Son 
proclaimed  all  sons  of  God5  joint  heirs  and  brothers 
all  This  epoch  is  marked  at  his  baptism  when  the 
Spirit  was  seen  descending  from  heaven  like  a^dove 
upon  him,  and  it  abode  with  him.  He  also  said  all 
are  God's,  manifest  in  the  flesh. 

uHe  boldly  taught  that  ignorance  is  the  cause  of 
all  sin.  He  saw  that,  in  order  to  practice  forgiveness, 
or  the  science  of  forgiving,  man  must  be  enlight- 
ened to  the  fact  that  man  has  the  power  to  forgive 
all  sin?  discord  and  inharmony;  that  it  is  not  God 
who  forgives  sin,  for  God  has  nothing  to  do  with  the 
sin,  sickness,  and  inharmony  of  man ;  that  man,  him- 
self, brought  these  into  being  and  man  is  the  only 
one  who  can  erase  or  forgive  them.  He  saw  that  man 
must  learn  that  ignorance  is  disregard  and  lack  of 
understanding  both  of  Divine  Mind  as  the  Creative 
Principle,  and  of  his  relation  to  that  Principle.  He 
saw  that  man  may  have  all  intellectual  knowledge 
and  be  versed  in  worldly  affairs,  yet  if  he  does  not 
recognize  the  Christ  as  the  living,  vitalizing  essence 
of  God  within  him,  he  is  grossly  ignorant  of  the  most 
important  factor  governing  his  life.  He  quickly  saw 
the  inconsistency  of  asking  a  perfectly  just  and  lov- 
ing Father  to  heal  a  disease  or  sin-  He  taught  that 
disease  is  the  effect  of  sin  and  that  forgiveness  is  an 
important  factor  in  healing ;  that  sickness  is  not  pun- 
ishment sent  from  God,  as  many  believe  it  to  be,  but 
is  the  result  of  man's  misunderstanding  of  his  real 
being.  He  taught  that  it  is  the  Truth  which  sets  free. 

108 


TEACHING  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

The  purity  of  Ms  teachings  has  caused  them  to  out- 
Eve  those  of  his  teachers. 

"When  Peter  said  that  he  forgave  seven  times, 
Jesus*  answer  was  that  he  forgave  seventy  times 
seven,  then  went  on  forgiving  until  the  act  was  uni- 
versal. In  order  to  forgive  hate,  he  centered  his 
attention  on  love.  This  was  not  only  when  it  touched 
his  life,  but  when  he  saw  it  manifest  in  the  world 
about  him.  This  Truth  was  the  inherent  ( light  that 
he  saw  in  all,  which  would  lead  them  out  of  dark- 
ness when  applied  with  understanding.  He  knew  that 
every  overcomer  was  covenanted  with  his  Lord  to 
be  continually  forgiving  sin,  in  meeting  every  in- 
harmony  with  Truth ;  and  this  was  his  way  of  being 
about  his  Father's  business.  He  saw  and  understood 
that  in  no  other  way  could  the  earth  be  transformed, 
and  peace  and  harmony  prevail  among  men,  and 
he  said,  clf  you  forgive  men  their  trespasses,  your 
heavenly  Father  will  also  forgive  you/ 

"In  order  to  appreciate  the  full  value  of  this 
statement,  you  may  ask,  'What  is  the  Father?'  The 
Father  is  Life,  Love,  Power,  and  Dominion,  and  all 
of  these  attributes  belong  to  the  child  by  rightful 
inheritance.  This  is  what  Paul  meant  when  he  said 
we  are  joint  heirs  with  Christ  to  the  God  Kingdom. 
This  does  not  mean  that  one  has  more  than  another. 
This  does  not  mean  that  the  eldest  son  gets  the  lar- 
ger portion  and  the  other  half  is  diyided  by  measure 
to  the  remaining  children.  To  be  a  joint  heir,  with 
Christ,  to  the  Kingdom  means  to  be  an  equal  par- 
ticipant in  all  the  blessings  of  the  God  Kingdom. 

"Sometimes  others  accuse  us  of  making  ourselves 
equal  with  Jesus.  That  is  because  they  do  not  under- 
stand what  is  meant  by  joint  heirship.  I  am  quite 
certain  there  is  not  one  among  us  that  would  say 

109 


THE  LIFE  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

he  was  on  the  same  plane  of  enlightenment  as  the 
great  Master,  with  his. great  white  purity.  This  joint 
heirship  means  to  have  the  possibility  of  the  same 
power,  the  same  strength,  the  same  degree  of  under- 
standing. And  yet  there  is  not  one  among  us  that 
does  not  realize  the  full  truth  of  the  promise  of  Jesus 
to  all  of  God's  children,  to  every  true  disciple,  that 
they  may  be  full  participants  in  all  the  qualities  of 
the  Godhead  as  fully  as  he  is.  We  fully  recognize 
his  meaning  when  he  said,  'Be  ye  perfect  even  as 
your  Father  in  heaven  is  perfect.'  We  know  full  well 
that  that  great  soul  never  for  a  moment  asked  of  his 
disciples  a  mental  or  moral  impossibility.  When  he 
saw  and  asked  perfection  of  man,  he  knew  that  he 
asked  only  that  which  man  can  live  up  to.  A  great 
many  have  taken  false  comfort  in  the  belief  that  they 
never  can  be  as  perfect  as  the  Master  is  perfect. 
They  argue  that  he  was  Divine  and  that  because  of 
his  divinity  he  did  marvelous  works  which  no  other 
member  of  humanity  could  possibly  do,  and  that 
therefore  it  is  absolutely  useless  to  try.  They  say 
they  are  here  with  nothing  better  or  more  skillful 
or  scientific  with  which  to  carve  out  life's  destiny 
than  mere  human  will  power.  The  great  Master 
made  it  clear  that,  while  it  did  take  some^  human 
will  power  to  start,  the  mere  human  will  is  not  a 
great  factor  in  the  case,  the  great  factor  being  divine 
understanding.  How  many  times  did  he  say,  "You 
shall  know  the  Truth  and  the  Truth  shall  make  you 
free.' 

uLet  us  reduce  this  to  the  simple  physics  of  the 
world  about  us.  The  moment  men  become  fully  ac- 
quainted with  the  truth  of  anything  in  the  physical 
world  about  them,  that  moment  they  become  free  of 
their  ignorant  concept  of  that  particular  thing.  The 


TEACHING  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

moment  men  became  acquainted  with  the  fact  that 
the  world  was  round  and  that  it  revolved  around  the 
sun?  they  became  free  from  the  antiquated  idea  of 
a  flat  earth  and  the  rising  and  setting  sun.  The 
moment  men  become  free  from  the  belief  that  they 
are  mere  human  beingss  subject  to  human  laws  of 
life  and  death  and  the  limitations  which  human 
beings  have  imposed,  that  moment  they  will  see  that 
they  are  free  from  all  human  limitations  and  may 
become  Sons  of  God  if  they  will  The  moment  they 
realize  they  are  Divine,  they  are  free  from  all  limi- 
tations and  possessed  of  the  strength  of  divinity ;  and 
man  knows  that  this  divinity  is  the  place  where  being 
comes  most  directly  in  contact  with  God.  Man  is 
beginning  to  see  and  know  that  this  divinity  is  not 
something  to  be  injected  into  each  from  without.  He 
is  beginning  to  know  that  it  is  the  very  life  of  each 
and  every  man. 

"We  know  that  the  ideals  we  see  in  the  lives  of 
others  take  root  in  our  lives,  and  in  compliance  with 
the  Divine  Law  bring  forth  after  their  kind.  As  long 
as  we  believe  in  the  power  of  sin  and  see  the  effect 
of  sin  as  a  reality,  the  punishment  of  that  sin  will 
be  vital  in  our  own  lives.  But  as  we  give  to  ourselves 
and  others  truly  righteous  thoughts  for  all  inhar- 
monious ones,  we  are  making  ready  the  harvest  of  a 
great  spiritual  feast  which  is  certain  to  follow  the 
seedtime.  Thus  forgiveness  has  a  two-fold  mission. 
It  frees  both  the  erring  and  the  loving  one,  for  back 
of  the  application  of  forgiveness  is  a  deep  and  radi- 
ant love,  a  love  founded  on  principle ;  a  love  that 
desires  to  give  for  the  joy  of  giving  with  no  thought 
of  reward,  save  that  of  the  Father's  approval  in  the 
words,  'This  is  My  beloved  Son  in  whom  I  am  well 
pleased.* 

in 


THE  IJFE  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

•  'These  words  are  just  as  true  for  us  as  they  are 
true  of  Jesus.  Your  sins,  sickness,  or  discord  are  no 
more  a  part  of  God,  or  your  true  self,  than  fungi  are 
a  part  of  the  plants  to  which  they  attach  themselves. 
They  are  the  false  excrescences  which  have  gathered 
upon  your  bodies  as  the  result  of  wrong  thinking. 
.The  thought  of  the  disease,  and  the  disease,  are 
merely  the  cause  and  the  effect.  Erase,  forgive  the 
cause,  and  the  effect  disappears.  Erase  the  false  be- 
lief, and  sickness  vanishes. 

"This  was  the  only  method  of  cure  that  Jesus 
ever  resorted  to.  He  erased  the  false  image  in  the 
consciousness  of  the  one  to  whom  he  ministered. 
He  first  raised  the  vibrations  of  his  own  body  by 
connecting  his  own  thoughts  with  those  of  Divine 
Mind,  and  holding  his  own  thoughts  steadfastly  in 
accord  with  those  of  the  perfection  of  the  Divine 
Mind  for  man ;  then  the  vibrations  of  his  body  be- 
came equal  to  the  vibrations  in  Divine  Mind.  Hav- 
ing thus  raised  the  vibrations  of  his  own  body  by 
his  steadfast  thought  of  the  Divine  Perfection,  .he 
was  able  to  raise  the  vibrations  of  the  body  of  the 
applicant  with  the  withered  arm  to  the  point  where 
he  could  erase  the  image  of  the  withered  arm  from 
his  own  consciousness.  Then  Jesus  could  say  to  him, 
"Stretch  forth  your  hand/  He  stretched 'it' forth  and 
it  became  whole.  Thus  Jesus  raised  the 'vibrations  of 
Ms  own  body  by  seeing  the  Divine  Perfection  for  all, 
and  this,  enabled  him  to  raise  the  vibrations  of  .the 
one  he  healed  until  the  image  of  imperfection  was 
entirely  erased;  then  perfection  was  instantaneous 
and  the  forgiveness  was  complete. 

"You  will  soon  find  that,  by  fixing  your  thoughts 
and  attention  steadfastly  on  God  and  His  divine 
perfection,  you  can  raise  the  vibrations  of  your 

112, 


TEACHING  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

so  that  they  will  blend  so  harmoniously  with- those 
of  the  divine  perfection,  that  you  are  absolutely  one 
with  the  divine  perfection  and  thus  one  with  God. 
You  are  then  able  so  to  influence  the  vibrations  of 
the  bodies  of  others  with  whom  you  come  in  contact, 
that  they  see  the  perfection  that  you  see.  Thus  you 
may  fulfill  the  divine  mission  and  your  part  is  com- 
plete. Or  you  may  see  imperfection  and  thus  lower 
the  vibrations  until  imperfection  is  the  result,  but 
if  you  do  this  you  can  not  escape  reaping  the  harvest 
of  the  seed  you  have  sown. 

"God  works  through  all  to  carry  out  His  perfect 
plans,  and  the  perfect,  loving  thoughts  continually 
going  forth  from  the  hearts  of  all  is  God's  'own 
message  to  His  children.  It  is  these  thoughts  that 
keep  the  vibrations  of  our  bodies  in  direct  touch 
with  the  divine  and  perfect  vibrations ;  and  this  seed 
is  the  Word  of  God  that  finds  lodgment  in  every 
receptive  heart,  whether  man  be  consciously  aware 
of  his  divine  nature  or  not.  We  are  approaching 
more  fully  to  our  divine  inheritance  when  we  can 
keep  our  thoughts  so  fully  upon  our  divine  perfection 
and  the  divine  perfection  of  all,  as  held  in  the  Mind 
of  God,  that  the  vibrations  of  our  body  are  in  direct 
harmonious  accord,  and  one  with  the  divine  vibra- 
tions sent  out  from  the  Mind  of  God.  But  in  order 
to  bring  forth  the  abundant  harvest  of  spiritual 
understanding,  our  thoughts  must  continuously  vi- 
brate with,  and  lay  hold  of,  the  perfect  harmonious 
thoughts  from  Divine  Mind,  or  Mind  of  God,  to 
man,  His  beloved  son.  We  soon  find  we  have  the 
power  to  enslave  or  to  free  ourselves,  as  well  asr  to 
forgive  every  sin  of  the  whole  human  family  through 
our  attitude  of  thought,  word,  or  deed,  and  through 
the  vibrations  thus  released,  to  the  whole  world. 

113 


THE  LIFE  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

Once  having  chosen  to  shape  our  thoughts  along 
definite  lines,  we  soon  find  that  we  are  sustained  by 
Omnipotence  itself ;  and  find  as  we  go  through  the 
discipline  necessary  to  assure  ourselves  of  mastery, 
that  it  is  a  glorious  privilege — this  power  which  we 
have  to  free  ourselves  and  our  fellow-men  from 
bondage  through  the  process  of  divine  thinking. 

"All  of  Jesus'  healings  were  on  the  basis  of  re- 
moving the  mental  cause.  So  we  find  that  it  is  neces- 
sary to  reduce  the  idealism  of  Jesus  to  practical 
demonstration,  and  by  so  doing  we  find  we  are  only 
doing  that  which  he  enjoined  us  to  do.  Many  sins 
vanish  at  the  first  few  rays  of  light  shed  into  the 
dark  concept,  while  others  more  firmly  rooted  in 
consciousness  require  patience  and  perseverance  to 
overcome.  The  forgiving  love  of  Christ  must  prevail 
if  we  do  not  obstruct  but  give  it  full  sway.  True 
forgiveness  purifies  and  blesses  all,  and  begins  in 
the  heart  of  the  individual  This  is  at  first  a  thought 
reformation,  and  thus  a  resurrection.  Realizing  that 
God  is  the  only  Mind,  and  this  Mind  is  pure  and 
holy,  will  do  much  to  keep  one  holding  steadfastly 
and  worshippingly  the  Truth  that  the  Mind  of 
Christ  is  having  its  perfect  way  in  you,  establishes 
you  in  these  harmonious  constructive  thought- 
currents.  You  become  aware  that  you  are  always  in 
the  ever-flowing  stream  of  the  loving  thoughts  which 
God  is  pouring  out  to  His  children. 

"You  will  soon  know  that  you  are  fast  approach- 
ing a  period  in  which  you  will  be  living  in  a  world 
of  thinkers.  You  will  know  that  thought  is  the  most 
potent  agency  in  the  universe.  You  will  soon  recog- 
nize that  thought  is  the  mediator  between  Divine 
Mind  and  every  bodily  ailment  or  discord  in  the 
world.  If  you  practice  looking  immediately  to  the 

114 


TEACHING  OF  THE   MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

Divine  Mind,  the  Kingdom  within,  when  discord  or 
inharmony  arises,  you  are  Immediately  united  with 
Divine  Ideas  and  you  will  find  that  Divine  Love  is 
ever  ready  to  give  its  healing  balm  of  pure  love  to 
those  who  seek. 

"Jesus  lives  today  to  wipe  out  of  human  con- 
sciousness the  power  and  reality  of  sin  and  its  effects. 
Fresh  from  the  heart  of  Love,  he  came  understand- 
ing the  relation  between  God  and  man ;  and  in  his 
fearless,  free  recognition  of  Spirit  as  the  only  power, 
he  proclaimed  the  supremacy  of  Divine  Law  which, 
when  understood  and  applied  to  every  act  of  living, 
will  transform  suffering  men  into  radiant  beings  and 
usher  in  the  only  real  kingdom  of  perfect  citizenship, 
the  Kingdom  of  Heaven  upon  earth.55  Here  Jast 
ceased  talking. 


115 


XII 

THE  sun  had  disappeared  below  the  horizon, 
and  the  beautiful  afterglow,  which  foretold  a 
peaceful  night,  was  flaming  across  the  entire 
expanse  of  sky.  It  was  the  first  evening  free  from 
wind  or  storm  that  we  had  experienced  in  ten  days, 
and  all  were  quietly  drinking  in  the  magnificent  dis- 
"play  of  color.  A  quiet  sunset  on  the  Gobi  can  enrap- 
ture one  into  a  reverie  of  forgetfuhiess  of  all  things. 
The'  colors  do  not  glow  and  shine ;  they  seem  to  dart 
here  and  there  in  great  beams,-  as  though  invisible 
hands  were  operating  colored  searchlights.  At  times 
it  seemed  as  if  these  invisible  hands  were  attempting 
to  show  the  full  range  of  the  spectrum  and  the  many 
variations  of  color  to  be  obtained  in  the  combina- 
tions. A  wide  band  of  white  light  would  appear; 
then  branching  off' at  an  oblique  angle  would  appear 
a  wide  band  of  violet.  From  this  violet  a  band  of 
indigo  would  shoot  out,  and  along  the -side  of  the 
indigo  a  band  of  blue  would  appear,  and  so  on  until 
the  whole  atmosphere  seemed  charged  with  wide 
bands  of  color.  Then  they  would  combine  and  blend 
again  to  the  band  of  white,  which  seemed  quite  sta- 
tionary. Again,  they  flashed  out  in  fan  formation,, 
with  beams  of  every  color  shooting  in  all  directions. 
This  gradually  subsided  into  a  solid  golden  color 
which  caused  the  undulating  sands  to  appear  like  a 
sea  of  heaving  molten  gold.  This  display  continued 
for  about  ten  minutes ;  then  it  faded  into  a  haze  of 
mottled  blue,  yellow,  green,  and  grey,  which  seemed 
to  drop  from  the  heavens  like  a  robe -of  night,  and 
darkness  was  upon  us.  So  quickly  did  the  darkness 


TEACHING  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

surround  us  that  a  number  of  the  party  expressed 
startled  surprise  at  its  suddenness. 

The  leader  of  the  expedition  turned  to  Bagget 
Irand  and  asked  if  he  would  give  us  his  version  of 
the  people  who  had  inhabited  the  region  and  estab- 
lished the  cities  like  the  one  that  lay  in  ruins  below 
us.  He  began  by  saying,  "We  have  written  records 
that  have  been  carefully  kept  from  generation  to 
generation  for  over  seventy  thousand  years,  and  these 
records  place  the  date  of  the  founding  of  the  city, 
the  ruins  of  which  lie  below  this  camp,  more  than, 
two  hundred  and  thirty  thousand  years  in  the  past. 
The  first  settlers  came  from  the  west  as  colonists 
many  years  prior  to  the  founding  of  this  city.  These 
colonists  settled  in  the  south  and  southwest ;  and  as 
the  colonies  gradually  developed,  some  of  the  people 
moved  north  and  west  until  they  inhabited  the  whole 
land.  As  fertile  fields  and  orchards  were  established, 
the  colonists  laid  the  foundations  for  cities.  At  first 
these  were  not  large,  but  as  years  went  by,  it  was 
found  convenient  to  gather  in  these  centers  for 
closer  fellowship  in  art  and  science. 

"Here  temples  were  built ;  not  as  places  of  wor- 
ship, for  the  people  worshipped  every  moment,  by 
the  life  they  lived.  Living  was  always  dedicated  to 
the  Great  Cause  of  life;  and  while  they  lived  co- 
operating with  the  Great  Cause,  life  never  failed 
them.  During  this  time  it  was  quite  common  to  find 
men  and  women  thousands  of  years  old.  In  fact, 
they  did  not  know  death.  They  passed  from  one 
accomplishment  to  a  higher  attainment  of  life  and 
its  reality.  They  accepted  life's  true  source,  and  it 
released  its  boundless  treasures  to  them  in  an  unend- 
ing stream  of  abundance.  But  I  have  digressed ;  let  as 
go  back  to  the;:,  temples.  These  were  places  where 

117 


THE  LIFE  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

written  records  of  any  attainment  in  knowledge  of 
the  arts,  science,  and  history  could  be  preserved  for 
those  who  wished  to  avail  themselves  of  them.  The 
temples  were  not  used  as  places  of  worship,  but  as 
places  where  the  most  profound  scientific  themes 
were  discussed.  The  acts  and  thought  of  worship  in 
those  days  were  carried  out  in  the  everyday  life  of 
the  individual  instead  of  being  set  aside  for  a  par- 
ticular group  of  people  or  at  specified  times. 

"They  found  it  more  convenient  to  have  broad 
smooth  thoroughfares  as  means  of  communication; 
so  they  developed  what  you  call  paving.  They  found 
it  convenient  to  build  comfortable  homes,  and  there- 
fore developed  the  method  of  hewing  stone,  and  of 
making  brick  and  the  mortar  necessary  to  hold  them 
in  place,  to  fashion  their  homes  and  the  temples. 
These  things  you  have  already  discovered.  They 
found  that  gold  was  a  most  serviceable  metal,  as  it 
did  not  tarnish.  They  found  means  for  collecting 
it  from  the  sands,  then  from  the  rocks,  and  at  last  a 
way  to  manufacture  it,  so  that  it  became  very  com- 
mon. The  people  found  the  way  to  produce  other 
metals  as  they  were  needed  and  these  became  plen- 
tiful. Then,  instead  of  these  communities  living  by 
agriculture  alone,  they  began  to  supply  those  that 
tilled  the  soil  with  manufactured  articles  as  conveni- 
ences for  a  wider  range  of  operations.  The  centers 
grew  and  developed  until  they  became  cities  of  one 
to  two  hundred  thousand  people. 

"Still  they  had  no  temporal  heads  or  rulers ;  all 
governing  was  entrusted  to  advisory  bodies  that  were 
selected  by  the  people  themselves.  Delegations  were 
sent  to,  and  received  from,  other  communities.  Yet 
the  people  promulgated  no  laws  or  rules  for  the  con- 
duct of  the  individual,  as  each  person  realized  his 

118 


TEACHING  OF  THE   MASTERS   OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

own  identity  and  lived  by  a  universal  law  governing 
that  identity*  There  was  no  need  for  man-made 
laws ;  there  was  need  only  for  wise  counsel. 

"Then  an  individual  here  and  an  individual  there 
began  to  wander  away*  At  first  they  were  the  more 
dominating  souls  and  they  would  push  on,  while 
those  that  were  inclined  to  plod  would  hold  back; 
and  unconsciously  there  came  a  separation,  as  the 
love  faculty  had  not  been  fully  developed  by  all.  The 
separation  grew  wider  and  wider  until  a  very  domi- 
nating personality  set  himself  up  as  king  and  tem- 
poral ruler.  Since  he  ruled  wisely,  the  people — with 
the  exception  of  a  few  who  felt  that  they  could  see 
the  future  of  this  separation — acceded  to  his  rule 
without  taking  a  thought  to  the  future.  These  few 
withdrew  into  communities  of  their  own ;  and  from 
that  time  on  they  lived  a  more  or  less  secluded  life, 
always  attempting  to  show  their  fellows  the  folly  of 
separation.  They  became  the  first  order  of  the  priest- 
hood; the  king  established  the  first  order  of  tem- 
poral rulers;  and  from  then  on  their  devious  ways 
may  only  be  followed  by  deep  study  and  research. 
There  are  a  few  that  have  preserved  the  simple 
teachings  and  have  lived  to  follow  them.  But  in  the 
main,  life  has  become  very  complex  to  the  majority. 
in  fact,  so  complex  has  It  become  that  they  refuse 
to  believe  that  life  is  a  simple  form  of  living  a  well- 
balanced  life  co-operating  directly  with  the  Principle 
of  all  life.  They  fail  to  see  that  their  way  of  living 
is  the  complex  and  hard  way,  and  that  the  simple 
life  co-operating  with  the  Principle  of  all  life  is  the 
more  abundant  life.  In  this  way  they  must  go  on 
until  they  know  a  better  way." 

Here  the  speaker  paused,  standing  silent  for  a 
moment,  and  a  picture  flashed  before  our  vision.  The 

119 


THE  LIFE  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

picture  was  stationary  at  first,  as  has  already  been 
described;  then  It  became  animated,  the  forms  be- 
gan to  move,  and  the  scenes  changed  momentarily, 
or  at  his  direction,  as  he  explained  each  scene.  He 
seemed  to  be  able  to  hold  or  reproduce  the  scene  at 
will,  as  questions  were  asked  and  answered  and  ex- 
planations given. 

The  scenes  were  those  which  were  supposed  to 
have  been  enacted  in  the  ruined  city  below  where 
we  were  camped.  They  did  not  contrast  to  any 
marked  degree  with  scenes  of  a  populous  Oriental 
city  of  today,  save  that  the  streets  were  broad  and 
well  kept.  The  people  were  well  clothed  in  raiment 
of  good  quality,  their  faces  were  bright  and  cheery, 
and  there  were  no  soldiers,  paupers,  or  beggars  in 
evidence.  The  architecture  attracted  our  attention 
as  the  buildings  were  well  and  substantially  built, 
and  of  very  pleasing  appearance.  Although  there 
seemed  to  be  no  attempt  at  display,  one  temple  stood 
out  magnificently  beautiful.  We  were  told  this  temple 
was  built  entirely  by  volunteer  hands,  and  was  one 
of  the  oldest  and  most  beautiful  in  the  land.  On  the 
whole,  if  these  pictures  were  representative,  the 
people  must  have  been  contented  and  happy.  We 
were  told  that  soldiers  did  not  make  their  appear- 
ance until  after  the  second  king  of  the  first  dynasty 
had  reigned  for  nearly  two  hundred  years.  That  king 
in  order  to  keep  up  his  retinue  began  taxing  the 
people,  and  soldiers  were  appointed  to  collect  the 
taxes.  In  about  fifty  years,  poverty  began  to  show  in 
isolated  places.  It  seems  that  about  this  time  a  por- 
tion of  the  people  who  were  dissatisfied  with  the 
kingdom  and  with  those  who  had  assumed  the  rule, 
withdrew.  Bagget  Irand  and  his  people  claim  the 
lineal  heritage  of  this  race. 


120 


TEACHING  OF  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

As  the  night  was  well  advanced,  Bagget  suggested 
that  we  adjourn  and  retire,  since  it  would  be  much 
pleasanter  to  make  an  early  morning  start-  About 
three  hours  of  the  full  noonday  heat  was  uncomfort- 
able for  travel,  and  the  time  of  winter  storms  was 
fast  approaching. 


CHAPTER  XIII 

WE  WERE  up  early  the  next  morning,  and  at 
break  of  day  were  on  our  way  to  Bagget 
Irand's  home  village,  which  we  reached  on 
the  evening  of  the  twelfth  day.  We  were  welcomed 
by  the  party  which  had  visited  us  the  last  afternoon 
of  our  stay  on  the  desert,  and  were  invited  to  stop 
for  a  few  days'  rest.  We  were  shown  to  quarters  that 
were  a  real  luxury  after  those  we  had  experienced 
on  the  desert.  After  we  had  made  ourselves  present- 
able, we  stepped  into  the  next  room  and  found  a 
number  of  friends.  They  greeted  us  heartily  and  we 
were  told  the  village  was  ours  and  that  every  door 
was  flung  wide  to  receive  us. 

The  Governor  of  the  village,  through  an  inter- 
preter, welcomed  us,  telling  us  we  were  to  dine  at 
his  house,  and  were  to  start  immediately.  We  filed 
out  of  the  room,  led  by  the  Governor  with  a  guard 
of  two  soldiers,  one  on  each  side,  as  was  the  custom 
of  the  country.  Next  came  the  leader  with  our  hos- 
tess, and  our  Chief  with  the  beautiful  lady.  Then 
came  Ernil  and  his  mother.  I  walked  with  them, 
the  rest  of  the  party  following. 

We  had  proceeded  but  a  short  distance  when  a 
poorly  dressed  child  stepped  from  the  crowd  which 
had  assembled  and  asked  in  the  native  tongue  if 
she  might  speak  to  Emil's  mother.  The  Governor 
brushed  her  aside  unceremoniously,  saying  that  we 
could  not  be  bothered  with  such  as  she.  Emil's 
mother  grasped  our  arms  and  the  three  of  us  stepped 
out  of  the  ranks  to  hear  what  the  girl  had  to  say. 
As  we  did  this,  our  hostess  hesitated  and  as  she 
stepped  out  of  the  ranks  the  whole  company  stopped. 

ISIft 


TEACHING  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

EmiTs  mother  spoke  to  the  Governor,  saying  she 
would  like  to  have  the  rest  go  on  and  get  seating 
arrangements  completed  and  that  by  that  time  we 
surely  would  be  there. 

Meanwhile,  she  was  holding  the  girl's  hands  In 
hers.  As  the  company  moved  on,  she  knelt  down  and, 
putting  her  arms  around  the  little  girl,  said,  "Dear 
one,  wFat  can  I  do  for  you?55  She  found  that  the 
child's  brother  had  fallen  that  afternoon  and  they 
thought  his  back  was  broken.  The  child  begged  the 
lady  to  go  with  her  to  see  if  she  could  not  help  him 
as  he  was  in  great  pain.  Emil's  mother  arose,  ex- 
plained the  situation  to  us  and  told  us  to  go  on,  that 
she  would  go  with  the  child,  then  come  in  later. 
The  leader  said  that  if  it  was  permissible,  he  would 
like  to  go  along.  Emil's  mother  invited  us  all  to  go  ; 
so  we  turned  aside  and  followed  her  and  the  girl  as 
they  walked  hand-in-hand,  the  girl  fairly  leaping 
with  joy.  Our  hostess  told  us  that  the  girl  was  certain 
her  brother  would  be  healed  by  the  great  lady,  As 
we  neared  the  house,  the  girl  bounded  ahead  to  tell 
her  family  we  were  coming. 

When  we  came  up  to  the  door,  we  saw  that  the 
house  was  but  a  mud  hut  of  the  lowest  order.  Emil's 
mother  must  have  interpreted  our  thoughts,  for  she 
said,  "Although  it  is  a  hovel,  warm  hearts  beat  with- 
in." At  that  moment  the  door  was  thrown  open,  a 
gruff  masculine  voice  spoke,  and  we  stepped  inside. 
If  the  hut  looked  wretched  from  without,  it  was 
doubly  so  from  within.  It  was  scarcely  large  enough 
for  us  to  crowd  into,  and  the  ceiling  was  so  low  that 
we  could  not  stand  erect.  A  dim  witch  light  burned 
and  cast  a  weird  light  upon  the  hard  faces  of  the 
father  and  mother  as  they  sat  amidst  their  squalor. 

In  the  far  corner,  on  a  mass  of  musty  straw  and 

123 


THE  LIFE  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

vile-smelling  rags  lay  a  lad  not  more  than  five  years 
old,  Ms  face  drawn  and  ashen  pale.  The  girl  knelt 
beside  him,  'holding  his  face  in  both  of  her  hands, 
one  pressed  against  each  cheek.  She  was  telling  him 
that  he  was  going  to  be  perfectly  well  again,  as  the 
beautiful  lady  was  already  there.  She  "removed  her 
hands,  moved  aside  to  give  him  a  clearer  view,  and 
for  the  first  time  she  saw  the  rest  of  the  party.  In- 
stantly her  expression  changed  and  a  great  fear 
seemed  to  pervade  her  whole  form.  She  dropped  her 
face  in  her  folded  arms  and  her  form  shook  with  a 
convulsive  sob  as  she  cried  out,  uOh,  I  thought  you 
were  coming  alone.59  Emil's  mother  dropped  on  her 
knees  beside  her3  put  both  arms  around  her  and  held 
her  close  for  a  moment.  She  became  silent,  and 
Emil's  mother  said  she  would  send  us  away,  if  the 
girl  wished  to  have  us  go.  The  girl  said  she  was  only 
surprised  and  frightened;  that  we  need  not  mind 
her,  as  she  was  only  thinking  of  her  brother. 

Then  Emil's  mother  said,  "You  love  your  brother 
dearly,  do  you  not?95  The  girl,  who  could  not  have 
been  more  than  nine  years  old  said,  "Yes,  but  I 
love  everyone."  The  conversation  was  interpreted 
to  us  by.  Emil,  as  none  of  our  party  spoke  the  lan- 
guage. Emil's  mother  said,  "If  you  love  your  brother 
so  much,  you  can  help  to  heal  him,"  and  she  told 
the  girl  to  take  the  position  she  had  been  in  and  to 
place  her  hands  on  each  side  of  his  face.  Then  Emil's 
mother  moved  'so  that  she  could  place  her  hand  on 
his  forehead.  Almost  instantly  the  moans  ceased,  the 
boy's  face  lighted  up,  his  little  form  relaxed,  a  per- 
fect calm  settled  over  the  whole  scene,  and  the  child 
slept  quietly  and  naturally. 

EmlFs  mother  and  the  girl  sat  as  they  were  for 
a  few  moments;  then  with  her  left  hand  the  lady 

1*4- 


OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  FAR  EAST 

the  girl's  the  boy's  iacef 

"How  beautiful  he  is,  how  strong  and  fine." 
Then  Emil's  mother  removed  her  hand  ever  so  gent- 
ly, as  1  to  be  standing  near  her, 
she  extended  her  left  hand  I  reached  out  my  hand 
"  in  order  to  her  to  her  feet.  As  her  hand  touched 
such  a  thrill  went  through  my  whole  body  that 
it  left  me  perfectly  helpless.  She  sprang  lightly  to 
her  feet  and  said,  "For  a  moment  I  forgot  myself. 
I  not  have  taken  your  hand  as  1  did,  for 
momentarily  I  seemed  to  be  overwhelmed^  so  great 
was  the  power  that  was  flowing  through  me."  I 
recovered  my  composure  almost  instantly.  The  others 
did  not  notice  as  they  were  all  deeply  engrossed  in 
what  was  going  on  around  them. 

The  girl  had  suddenly  thrown  herself  at  Emil's 
mother's  feet  and  clasping  each  in  one  of  her 
was  frantically  kissing  the  coverings.  Emil's 
reached  down  and  with  one  hand  turned  the  fervent 
tear-stained  face  upward,  then  knelt  and  clasped 
the  child  to  her  and  kissed  her  eyes  and  lips.  The 
child  put  both  arms  around  the  mother's  neck  and 
both  were  motionless  for  a  moment;  then  that 
strange  light  began  to  pervade  the  room  and  it  grew 
brighter  and  brighter  until  every  object  seemed  to 
be  suffused  with  the  light  and  nothing  cast  a  shadow. 
The  room  seemed  to  be  expanding.  The  father  and 
the  mother  of  the  two  children  had  sat  on  the  dirt 
floor  in  stony-faced  silence  thus  far.  They  arose,  and 
the  expression  on  their  faces  changed  to  blank  dis- 
may, then  to  fright,  and  the  man  bolted  through  the 
door,  nearly 'upsetting  the  leader  of  the  expedition  in 
his  haste  to  get  away. 

•    The  mother  of  the  household  threw  herself  pros- 
trate at  the  side  of  Emil's  mother  and  sobs  shook: 


125 


THE  LIFE  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

her  frame.  Emii's  mother  placed  her  hand  on  the 
woman's  forehead,  speaking  in  a  low  voice  to  her. 
Presently  the  sobs  ceased,  she  drew  herself  to  a  half- 
sitting,  half-kneeling  position,  and  saw  the  trans- 
formation that  had  taken  place  in  the  room.  The 
expression  on  her  face  changed  to  one  of  terror ;  she 
rose  hastily  to  her  feet  and  started  to  run  from  the 
room.  Emil  reached  out  his  hand,  and  took  one  of 
her  hands  while  the  beautiful  lady  took  the  other. 
They  held  her  hands  thus  for  a  moment  and  the 
frightened  expression  changed  to  a  smile. 

We  looked  around,  and  in  place  of  the  hovel  we 
had  entered,  we  were  in  a  moderately  comfortably 
furnished  room  with  seats,  table,  and  a  clean  bed. 
Emil  walked  over  and  picked  up  the  boy,  still  sound 
asleep,  from  the  heap  of  musty  straw  and  rags, 
placed  him  tenderly  on  the  clean  bed  and  drew-  the 
covers  over  him.  As  he  did  so  he  stooped  and  kissed 
the  child's  forehead  as  tenderly  as  any  woman  could 
have  done. 

EmiFs  mother  and  the  girl  arose  and  walked  to 
where  the  mother  of  the  household  stood.  We  all 
gathered  around  them.  The  mother  sank  to  her 
knees,  and  grasping  the  feet  of  Emil's  mother,  began 
kissing  them  and  entreating  her  not  to  leave.  Emil 
stepped  forward,  and  stooping  down,  took  the 
woman's  hands  and  drew  her  to  her  feet;  all  the 
time  speaking  quietly  to  her  in  her  own  language. 
As  she  stood  erect,  the  old  soiled  garments  she  had 
been  wearing  were  changed  to  new  ones.  She  stood 
in  mystified  silence  for  a  moment,  then  threw  her- 
self into  the  outstretched  arms  of  EmiPs  mother. 
They  stood  in  this  attitude  for  a  moment,  when  Emil 
reached  out  and  placing  his  hands  upon  their  arms 
separated  them. 


TEACHING  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

Then  the  girl  rushed  forward  with  outstretched 
hands  crying,  "See,  see,  my  things  are  new."  She 
turned  to  Emil's  mother  who  stooped  and  picked  her 
up.  The  child  put  her  arms  around  her  neck  with  her 
face  close  to  her  shoulder.  The  leader  of  the  expe- 
dition was  standing  just  back  of  Emil's  mother,  and 
the  child  reached  out  her  hands  over  the  mother's 
shoulder  toward  him,  lifted  her  face,  and  gave  him 
a  happy  smile.  The  leader  stepped  forward  and  held 
out  his  hands.  The  child  clasped  them,  saying  that 
she  loved  us  all  but  not  as  much  as  she  did  this  dear 
lady,  meaning  Emil's  mother. 

Emil  said  he  would  go  and  find  the  father.  He 
returned  in  a  few  moments,  bringing  the  frightened 
and  half-sullen  father  with  him.  Still,  we  could  see 
that  underneath  the  sullenness  there  was  a  deep 
appreciation.  We  prepared  to  leave  and  as  we  left, 
the  mother  of  the  household  asked  if  we  would  not 
come  again  and  was  told  that  we  would  see  her 
again  the  next  day. 

We  hurried  away  to  the  Governor's  house,  fear- 
ful lest  we  had  kept  the  party  waiting.  Although 
the  time  had  seemed  hours,  we  could  not  have  been 
away  more  than  thirty  minutes.  I  am  certain  it 
all  happened  in  much  less  time  than  it  has  taken  me 
to  write  about  it.  We  arrived  at  the  house  just  as  the 
rest  of  the  party  were  taking  their  seats  at  the  table. 
The  leader  of  the  expedition  asked  if  he  might  sit 
by  our  Chief  and  it  was  so  arranged.  It  was  easily 
seen  that  he  was  very  much  agitated,  and  the  Chief 
said  afterwards  that  the  man  was  so  moved  by  what 
he  had  seen  that  he  could  scarcely  keep  quiet.  The 
seating  arrangements  were:  the  Governor  at  the 
head  of  the  table,  at  his  right  Emil's  mother,  then 
Emil,  the  beautiful  lady,  our  Chief,  and  the  leader 

127 


LIFE  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

of  the  expedition.'  On  the  Governor's  'left  sat  our 

then  Emil's  son  and  his  sister*  I 
arrangements  because  of  what  happened  later. 

we  all  were  seated,  the  meal 
very  nicely  until  It  was  about  half  concluded.  The 
Governor  addressed  Bagget  Irand,  him  if  he 

would  not  continue  a  talk  he  had  started  a  time 

before  which  had  been  interrupted  by  the  arrival  of 
a  from  a  larger  village.  arose 

they  had  been  talking  of  the  similarity  of 
the  lives  of  Buddha  and  Jesus.  With  our  permission 
he  would  continue  the  talk,  but  it  would  be  neces- 
sary to  in  a  language  that  the  host  understood, 
as  it  was  not  customary  to  have  an  interpreter 
the  speaker  did  not  speak  the  language  of  the  people. 
Jast  volunteered  to  act  as  interpreter,  but  when  the 
Governor  understood  the  situation  he  insisted  that 
Irand  should  speak  in  English  and  Jast  would 
interpret  to  him,  as  the  greater  majority  spoke  and 
understood  English. 

Then  Bagget  Irand  went  on  to  say:  "We  can 
compare  in  our  own  thoughts  what  the  power  of  man 
would  be  if  all  the  attributes  of  true  Spirit  domi- 
nated his  every  action,  deed,  and  thought;  or  as 
Jesus  said,  'When  the  Holy  Spirit  has  come  upon 
you/  In  this  he  referred  to  the  time  when  the  God 
Power  should  fully  determine  the  lives  of  all  His 
children.  This  means  God  manifest  in  the  flesh.  In 
reality  ?  do  we  not  see  this  spiritual  unfoldment  for 
all  people  coming  through  the  lives  and  teachings 
of  the  seers  and  prophets  in  a  greater  or  lesser  de- 
gree, in  proportion  as  their  spiritual  unfoldment 
approaches  the  perfect  development  of  God  mani- 
festing through  all  his  children? 

"It  is  quite  evident  that  those  who  have  followed 


TEACHING  OF  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

steadfastly  the  true  ideals  of  life  which  they  have 
perceived  as  directly  from  God — and  thus 

connecting  God  with  man — have  made  the  greatest 
attainments  toward  nobility  of  character  purity  of 
sou!,  and  moral  grandeur  of  life.  Should  those  who 
seek  to  follow  them  by  Incorporating  their  Ideals  In 
individuality  be  able  to  accomplish  as  they  have 
accomplished,  the  world  must  finally  accept  that  the 
lessons  they  gave  out,  and  their  lives,  presage  the 
undeveloped  possibilities  of  all  God's  children, 

"Still  none  of  these  has  claimed  that  they  have 
reached  the  ultimate  perfection  which  God  has 
chosen  for  His  children ;  for  Jesus  said,  cHe  that  be- 
lieves In  me,  the  works  that  I  do  shall  he  do  also, 
yet  I  go  unto  the  Father/  Both  Jesus  and  Buddha 
said,  'You  shall  be  perfect  even  as  your  Father  in 
heaven  Is  perfect." 

"These  sons  of  God  are  not  mythical  persons,  but 
their  lives  and  work  have  spoken  definitely  In  the 
lives  and  hearts  of  men  all  down  through  the  his- 
torical ages.  There  have  been  myth  and  tradition 
woven  about  their  lives.  The  effective  test  is  for  one 
who  is  interested  in  their  lives  and  characters  per- 
sonally to  accept  and  apply  their  teaching  In  his 
everyday  life.  The  fact  that  the  ideals  expressed  by 
these  great  men  are  those  held  as  the  ideals  that 
govern  all  truly  great  people  is  a  further  proof  of 
their  truth.  If  one  attempts  to  refute  the  lives  of 
these  great  men,  one  may  as  well  ask  why  great 
religions  exist.  It  is  most  certain  that  they  are  the 
foundation,  and  bear  the  footprints  of  an  irresistible 
instinctive  urge,  or  Instinct,  which  has  presaged  the 
great  depth  and  true  basis  of  the  betterment  of  man- 
kind ;  and  they  outlive  and  outshine  any  other  pos- 


THE  LIFE  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

siblc  attempt  to  relieve  the  human  family  from  limi- 
tation and  bondage. 

aThe  records  of  these  men's  lives  are  preserved 
for  us;  and  their  lives  become  a  legitimate  source 
of  inquiry  and  research  if  we  will  but  open  our 
hearts,  pursue  this  inquiry  with  an  open  mind,  and 
make  their  lives,  teaching  and  ideals  our  very  own. 
In  no  other  way  can  we  enter  in  and  become  one 
with  their  lives.  This  has  been  the  inspired  message 
of  every  true  seer  since  the  world's  history  began. 
Two,  at  least,  of  these  spiritually  enlightened  men, 
Jesus  and  Buddha,  brought  to  fruition  the  great 
possibilities  they  taught.  They  have  said,  in  almost 
the  same  words,  *I  am  the  way,  the  truth,  and  the 
light  of  life  for  all  men.5  In  the  divinity  of  their 
attitude  they  assumed  they  could  truly  say,  6l  am 
the  light  of  the  world.  He  who  follows  me,  who 
walks  and  lives  as  I  have  lived,  shall  not  walk  in 
darkness  but  shall  have  Eternal  Life  and  shall  be 
abundantly  free  from  all  limitations.'  Both,  in  nearly 
the  same  words,  said,  'To  this  end  was  I  born  and 
for  this  cause  came  I  into  the  world,  that  I  should 
bear  witness  unto  the  Truth.  Every  one  that  is  of 
this  Truth,  hears  my  voice.'  These  words  must  have 
had  a  direct  bearing  upon  the  true  unfoldment  of 
the  Christ  life  in  every  child  of  God. 

"Do  not  all  the  religions  of  the  world  reveal  a 
higher  power  in  man  that  is  struggling  to  be  free 
from  the  limitations  of  sense?  The  scriptures  of  the 
different  races  are  outward  expressions  of  this  intelli- 
gence. The  Book  of  Job  in  your  Bible  antedates  all 
your  history.  It  was  written  in  this  country  and  its 
mystical  meaning  has  been  preserved  through  all  the 
changes  that  have  taken  place,  although  it  has  been 
nearly  smothered  by  the  addition  of  folk  lore. 

130 


TEACHING  OF  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

rhough  the  people  were  nearly  all  consumed,  the 
nystical  word  of  Job  will  never  be  consumed,  for 
ic  that  dwells  In  the  secret  place  of  the  Most  High 
Iwells  in  the  shadow  of  the  Almighty  arid  has  the 
inderstanding  of  the  Almighty  One.  Another  thing 
ve  must  see  is  that  all  scriptures  came  from  religion 
md  not  religion  from  the  scriptures.  The  scriptures 
ire  a  product  of  religion,  not  the  cause  of'  it.  The 
listory  of  religion  came  out  of  experiences,  while  the 
jospels  came  out  of  all  religions. 

"You  will  soon  find  that  unity  of  purpose  and 
effort  will  be  the  most  potent  means  to  attain  any 
lesired  end.  Instead  of  numerous  people  thinking  in 
ill  directions,  and  pulling  in  as  many,  they  will  think 
is  ones  Then  man  will  know  what  it  means  to  give 
i  long  pull  and  a  strong  pull  and  a  pull  all  together. 
Then  you  will  see  that  when  the  unity  of  will  is  set 
n  motion  all  things  are  possible.  When  man  casts  the 
;elfish  satanic  thoughts  from  his  consciousness,  the 
Battle  of  Gog  and  Magog  will  cease ;  and  this  will 
lot  be  accomplished  by  any  outside  deity. 

"When  Jesus  said,  cMy  words  are  spirit  and  they 
ire  life/  he  touched  that  inner  word  that  created 
ill  things ;  and  he  knew  that  his  word  was  filled  with 
i  life  essence  and  the  moving  power  that  would 
produce  the  thing  he  desired.  If  these  words  would 
ing  through  the  souls  of  all  men  and  nations,  they 
vould  know  that  they  have  access  to  the  fountain  of 
Sternal  Life  which  flows  from  God. 

"Some  may  express  the  Christ  by  seeing  the 
Christ  enthroned  just  back  of  the  heart,  the  seat  of 
ove.  From  this  throne  see  the  Christ  directing  every 
ictivity  of  your  body  in  perfect  accord  with  God's 
mmutable  law,  and  know  that  you  are  co-operating 
Christ  in  the  ideals  received  direct  from  the 


THE -LIFE  OF  THE.  MASTERS  OF  THE  'FAR:  EAST 

.Divine  Mind.  Then  see  the  Christ  seated  on 
throne^  expanding  and  including  every  atom,  cell, 
Sbre5  muscle,  and  organ  of  your  whole  body.  In  fact, 
He  has  expanded  until  your  whole  body  is  the  pure 
Christ,  the  only  begotten  Son  of  God;  the  pure 
•temple  where  God  is  at  home  and  loves  to  dwell, 
From  this  throne  you  can  call  upon  every  center  of 
your  whole  body.'  You  can  say  to  those  centers  that 
you  are  positive,  loving,  powerful,  wise,  fearless,  free 
spirit.  You  are  pure  with  the  purity  of  Spirit.  No 
mortal  thought  or  desire  or  impurity  can  come  near 
you.  You  are  immersed  in  the  pure  Christ.  The 
Spirit  of  life  in  the  Christ  makes  you  the  pure  temple 
of  God.  Here  you  may  pause  and  say,  "Father,  in 
this  as  well  as  in  all  things,  reveal  the  Christ,  Your 
perfect  Son  to  me.3  Then  bless  the  Christ. 

"When  you  have  realized  the  Christ,  you  may 
hold  out  your  hand,  and  if  it  is  gold  you  want,  the 
gold  will  be  there.59  Here  he  held  out  his  hands  and 
there  was  a  circular  disc  of  gold  somewhat  larger 
than  an  English  sovereign  in  each  hand.  He  passed 
them  to  those  sitting  at  his  right  and  left  and  they 
in  turn  passed  them  on  until  the  discs  had  made  the 
rounds  of  the  whole  table.  (We  preserved  them  and 
had  them  examined  by  experts,  who  pronounced 
them  pure  gold.) 

"If  you  wish  to  assist  others,  see  the  Christ  en- 
throned in  them  as  he  is  in  you,  and  speak  to  the 
Christ  in  them  as  though  you  were  talking  directly 
'o  them. 

"If  you  want  to  get  a  clearer  view  of  any  subject 
than  you,  have  at  present,  let  the  Christ  speak  men- 
tally to  the  abstract  soul  of  that  subject  or  thing. 
Then  ask  the  intelligence  within  the  thing  to  tell  you 
tbout  itself. 


IS* 


TEACHING  OF  THE   MASTERS   OF  THE  FAR  'EAST 

"God's  children  are  just  as  necessary  to  Him  In 
the  carrying  out  of  His  perfect  plan  as  any  plant, 
flower,  or  tree  is ;  and  It  is  necessary  for  them  to 
co-operate  in  the  perfect  way  which  He  sees.  It  was 
the  withdrawal  of  man  from  this  perfect  plan  of 
co-operation  that  threw  the  world  out  of  balance  and 
caused  great  waves  to  sweep  over  and  destroy  the 
greater  portion  of  His  children.  It  is  the  perfect 
thought  of  Love  co-operating  with  Poise  and  Power 
in  the  hearts  of  God's  children  that  holds  the  earth 
in  balance.  When  they  dissipated  that  force  in 
thoughts  of  sin  and  lust,  it  swung  so  far  out  of  bal- 
ance that  the  great  waves  rushed  over  and  nearly 
annihilated  man  and  the  work  he  had  accomplished. 
At  that  time  man  had  accomplished  far  more  than 
he  has  today.  But  God  cannot  control  man's  thoughts 
of  love  and  balance,  or  hate  and  unbalance;  they 
are  for  man  to  control.  When  the  thought  force  that 
threw  the  earth  out  of  balance  was  dissipated  by  the 
great  cataclysm  it  had  brought  on,  then  God  in  His 
mighty  power  could  restore  the  earth  to  its  proper 
equilibrium  or  balance ;  but  as  long  as  man's  thought 
held  sway,  God  was  powerless  to  act."  Here  Bagget 
Irand  ceased  speaking  and  took  his  seat. 

We  had  noticed  that  our  host,  the  Governor,  had 
betrayed  signs  of  uneasiness  and  considerable  ex- 
citement ;  and  when  Bagget  Irand  took  his  seat,  our 
host's  excitement  burst  forth  In  an  exclamation 
which  carried  the  meaning  of  "Dog,  dog  of  a  Chris- 
tian, you  have  defamed  the  name  of  our  fair  Buddha 
and  you  shall  suffer!"  At  this  he  pulled  a  cord  that 
hung  from  the  celling  near  him.  Instantly  three 
doors  flew  open  at  the  opposite  end  of  the  room 
from  where  he  was  sitting  and  In  rushed  thirty  sol- 
diers with  drawn  swords.  He  had  risen  from  his  seat 


THE  LIFE  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

at  the  table,  and  the  two  guards  who  had  accom- 
panied him  and  were  standing  just  back  of  his  chair 
during  the  meal,  stepped  forward  to  his  side.  Raising 
his  hand,  he  gave  an  order.  Ten  of  the  soldiers  came 
forward  and  arranged  themselves  along  the  wall 
back  of  where  Bagget  was  sitting ;  two  stepped  for- 
ward and  took  their  stand  just  back  of  and  on  each 
side  of  his  chair.  The  commander  walked  forward 
and  stood  at  attention  a  short  distance  from  where 
the  Governor  and  his  two  guards  stood.  Not  a  word 
had  been  spoken  by  any  of  the  company,  and  scarce- 
ly a  move  had  been  made.  We  sat  completely  over- 
come by  the  suddenness  of  the  change. 

Then  a  deep  silence  seemed  to  fall,  and  a  strong 
light  blazed  forth  In  the  room  at  the  head  of  the 
table  just  in  front  of  where  the  Governor  stood. 
Every  eye  was  upon  his  face  as  he  stood  with  up- 
raised hand  as  though  about  to  give  another  order , 
but  his  face  was  ashen  pale  and  a  look  of  horror  had 
corne  over  it.  A  dim  form  seemed  to  be  standing  on 
the  table  before  him.  All  heard  the  word,  "Stop," 
pronounced  clearly  and  very  forcefully  and  the  word 
itself  stood  out  in  flaming  letters  between  the  dim 
form  and  the  Governor.  The  Governor  seemed  to 
understand,  for  he  stood  as  though  transfixed  and 
as  rigid  as  a  statue.  By  this  time  the  dim  form  had 
taken  definite  ^shape,  and  we  recognized  It  as  that  of 
Jesus  as  we  had  seen  him  before.  But  the  thing  that 
amazed  us  was  that  another  dim  form  was  standing 
beside  him,  and  it  was  this  form  that  was  holding  the 
attention  of  the  Governor  and  all  the  soldiers.  They 
seemed  to  recognize  and  to  fear  the  dim  form  that 
stood  by  the  side  of  Jesus  far  more  than  they  did 
Jesus.  As  we  looked  around  they  were  standing  per- 
fectly rigid.  As  the  second  form  grew  more  distinct, 

234 


TEACHING  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

it  raised  its  right  hand  as  Jesus  had  done,  and  at 
this  every  sword  fell  from  the  soldiers'  hands,  clat- 
tering to  the  floor.  The  room  re-echoed  with  the 
sound,  so  deep  was  the  stillness.  The  light  seemed 
to  glow  with  a  far  greater  intensity;  indeed,  so  in- 
tense did  the  light  become  that  we  could  scarcely  see. 

The  commander  was  the  first  to  recover.  He 
stretched  forth  his  hands,  exclaiming,  "Buddha,  our 
Buddha,  the  Sublime  One."  Then  the  Governor  ex- 
claimed, "It  is  indeed  the  Sublime  One,5*  and  threw 
himself  prostrate  on  the  floor.  The  two  guards 
stepped  forward  and  assisted  him  to  his  feet,  then 
stood  silent  and  immovable  as  statues. 

A  shout  went  up  from  the  soldiers,  who  had  ar- 
ranged themselves  at  the  far  end  of  the  room.  They 
rushed  pell-mell  along  each  side  of  the  table  and 
crowded  together  at  the  head,  shouting,  uThe  Su- 
blime One  has  come  to  destroy  the  dogs  of  Christians 
and  their  leader."  At  this  Buddha  stepped  back  upon 
the  table  until  he  could  look  them  all  in  the  face  and 
raised  his  hand  with  the  words,  "It  is  not  once  that 
I  say  'Stop!'  not  twice  that  I  say,  'Stop!'  but  three 
times  that  I  say,  'Stop!'  "  Each  time  when  he  pro- 
nounced the  word  it  appeared  in  flaming  letters  as 
it  had  when  Jesus  had  pronounced  it ;  and  the  words 
did  not  disappear — they  remained. 

The  crowd  of  soldiers  again  stood  and  stared  as 
though  transfixed,  some  with  their  hands  in  the  air, 
some  with  one  foot  from  the  floor,  in  the  attitude  in 
which  they  happened  to  be  at  the  instant  Buddha 
had  raised  his  hand.  He  again  walked  to  where  Jesus 
stood,  and,  placing  his  left  hand  under  Jesus'  raised 
arm,  said,  "In  this  as  in  all  things  I  support  the 
upraised  hand  of  my  dear  brother  here."  Then  he 
placed  his  right  hand  upon  Jesus'  shoulder  and  they 

*35 


'  THE  LIFE  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

stood  In  this  attitude  for  a  moment;  then  both 
stepped  'lightly  from  the  table,  while  Governor,, 
commander,  guards,  and  soldiers  fell  back,  staring 
at  them  with  blank,  ashen  faces.  The  Governor  sank 
into  his  chair  that  had  been  moved  back  until  it  was 
against  the  wall  of  the  room,  and  every  one  of  the 
company  gave  vent  to  a  sigh  of  relief.  I  think  scarcely 
one  of  us  had. drawn  a  full  breath  during  the  few 
minutes  it  took  to  enact  this  scene. 

Then  Buddha  locked  his  arm  In  that  of  Jesus 
and  the  two  walked  directly  in  front  of  the  Gover- 
nor, In  words  that  were  thrown  from  him  with  such 
force  that  they  seemed  to  rebound  from  the  walls, 
Buddha  said,  "Dare  you  for  one  moment  call  these, 
our  dear  brothers,  Christian  dogs?  You,  who  but  a 
short  time  since,  ruthlessly  cast  aside  a  little  child 
who  was  pleading  for  help  for  a  loved  one.  This  dear, 
great  soul  here  turned  aside  and  heeded  the  call." 
Here  he  dropped  Jesus'  arm,  turned,  and  with  hand 
extended  toward  Emil's  mother,  stepped  toward  her. 
As  he  continued,  he  turned  half-way  around  so  that 
he  could  look  from  the  Governor  to  Emil's  mother. 
It  was  plainly  seen  that  he  was  deeply  stirred.  He 
fairly  flung  the  words  from  him  as,  looking  at  the 
Governor,  he ,  continued,  "You,  who  should  have 
been  the  first  to  respond  to  the  call  of  that  dear  child, 
shirked  your  duty;  and  then  you  call  the  one  that 
did  respond,  a  Christian  dog.  Go,  and  s£e  the  re- 
stored child,  whose  body  but  a  moment  before  was 
torn  and  writhing  in  anguish.  See  the  comfortable 
home  that  has  been  reared  from  the  hovel  that  your 
acts  are  partially  responsible  for  thrusting  upon  these 
dear  ones.  See  the  miserable  heap  of  filth  and  rags 
that  this  dear  soul,"  turning  to  Emil,  "raised  that 
child's  body  from.  See  how  tenderly  he  raised  him 

136 


TEACHING  OF  MASTERS  OF  THE  EAST 

placed  In  a  ciean^  couch.  Then  sec 

after  he  had  raised  the  little  body,  the 
and          disappeared.          you, 
you  are3  were  sitting  at  ease  in  the  Is  to 

be  worn  only  by  those  that  are  pure.  You  dare  to 
call  these  that  have  in  no  way  you  or  an- 

other, Christian  dogs;  you  call  yourself  the 

follower  of  Buddha,  the  Priest  of  the 

here.  Shame!  Shame!  Shame!" 

It  seemed  that  every  word  would  hit  the  Gover- 
nor^ the  chair,  and  the  draperies  and 
rebound.  At  any  rate,  they  were  sent  with  force 
that  the  Governor  trembleds  and  the  flut- 
tered as  though  they  were  blown  by  a  wind. 
There  was  no  question  of  an  interpreter;  the  Gov- 
ernor did  not  need  one.  He  understood  perfectly, 
although  the  words  were  In  the  purest 
English. 

Buddha  turned  and  walked  to  the  two  who 
had  received  the  gold  pieces,  and  If  he 

have  them.  They  handed  the  discs  to  him,  and  with 
these  In  his  open  hand,  he  walked  back  to  the  Gov- 
ernor and  addressed  directly  to  him,  saying, 
"Put  forth  your  hands."  The  Governor  did  so,  but 
they  were  trembling  so  greatly  that  he  could  scarcely 
hold  them  out.  Buddha  dropped  a  disc  in  hand, 
and  almost  instantly  It  disappeared.  said, 
"Sec,  even  pure  gold  will  fly  from  your  hands59 ;  and 
the  two  discs  landed  almost  simultaneously '  on  the 
table  before  the  two  men  that  had  received 
them. 

Buddha  reached  out  both  hands,  placed  them  00 
the  Governor's  outstretched  hands,  and  in  a  mild, 
calm  voice  said,  "Brother,  you  need  not  fear.  I  do 
not  judge  you,  you  are  only  judging  •  yourself ."  He 


THE  LIFE  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

held  his  hands  thus  and  stood  quietly  until  the  Gov- 
ernor became  calm.  Then  he  removed  his  hands 
and  said,  "You  are  quick  to  fly  with  your  swords, 
to  redress  what  you  judge  to  be  a  wrong.  But  remem- 
ber, when  you  are  judging  and  condemning  other 
men  you  are  judging  and  condemning  yourself.55 

He  returned  to  Jesus'  side  as  he  said,  "We  who 
know,  stand  together  for  the  common  good  and 
brotherly  love  of  all  mankind."  He  again  linked  his 
arm  with  Jesus'  and  said,  "Well,  Brother,  I  think 
I  took  this  affairs  out  of  your  hands  entirely.  It  is  all 
in  your  hands  now."  Jesus  replied,  "You  have  done 
nobly,  and  I  cannot  thank  you  enough."  They  turned 
and  bowed,  then  arm  in  arm  walked  through  the 
door  and  disappeared. 

The  room  at  once  broke  into  a  hubbub  of  voices. 
The  Governor,  commander,  soldiers,  and  guards  all 
crowded  around  to  shake  our  hands.  Everybody  was 
trying  to  make  himself  understood  at  the  same  time. 
The  Governor  spoke  to  Emil,  and  he  raised  his  hand 
for  silence.  As  soon  as  he  could  be  heard,  he  said  the 
Governor  would  like  us  again  to  be  seated  at  the 
table. 

When  all  had  resumed  their  seats  and  quiet  had 
been  restored,  we  saw  that  the  commander  had 
drawn  the  soldiers  back  into  formation  at  each  side 
of  the  table  and  back  of  the  Governor's  chair  which 
had  been  drawn  near  the  table.  The  Governor  arose, 
and,  with  Emil  acting  as  interpreter,  said,  "I  allowed 
my  zeal  to  get  the  better  of  me,  for  which  I  am 
heartily  ashamed  and  doubly  sorry.  I  do  not  think  it 
is  necessary  for  me  to  say  this  after  what  has  hap- 
pened. I  believe  you  can  see  by  my  attitude  that  I 
have  changed,  and  I  wish  to  ask  Brother  Bagget  to 
arise  and  accept  my  most  humble  apology.  Now 

138 


TEACHING  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

will  the  whole  company  arise  ?"  After  they  had  risen, 
he  said,  "I  ask  you  all  to  kindly  accept  my  most 
humble  apology.  I  extend  to  you  all  a  most  hearty 
welcome ;  and  if  you  so  desire,  I  hope  you  will  stay 
among  us  always.  If  you  wish  a  military  escort  at  any 
time,  which  I  judge  you  do  not,  I  shall — and  I  know 
the  commander  here  will  also — deem  it  a  high 
honor  to  be  of  service  to  you.  I  can  not  say  more. 
I  bid  you  all  goodnight.  Before  you  go,  I  wish  to 
say  that  everything  I  have  is  at  your  command. 
I  salute  you,  and  the  soldiers  salute  you  also;  and 
they  will  escort  you  to  your  quarters.  Again  I  bid 
you  goodnight  and  salaam  to  you  in  the  name  of  the 
Great  Buddha,  the  Celestial  One." 

The  commander,  making  profuse  apologies  and 
saying  that  he  was  certain  we  were  in  league  with 
the  Celestial  One,  with  five  of  his  soldiers  escorted 
us  to  our  quarters.  As  they  left  they  gave  us  a  salute, 
which  is  executed  by  forming  in  a  half  circle  around 
the  commanding  officer  and  presenting  their  swords 
so  that  their  points  just  touch  the  point  of  their  com- 
mander's sword.  Then  they  turned  quickly,  swept 
off  their  hats,  and  salaamed  very  low,  touching  one 
knee  to  the  ground.  This  salute  is  given  only  on  great 
state  occasions.  We  accepted  the  salute  as  best  we 
knew  how,  and  they  departed.  We  went  into  the 
house,  immediately  took  leave  of  our  friends  and 
host,  and  prepared  to  go  to  our  tent.  There  were  so 
many  of  us  that  the  rest-house  had  not  accommo- 
dated all;  so  our  camp  had  been  set  up  in  the  en- 
closure at  the  rear  of  the  house. 

As  we  reached  our  camp,  the  leader  sat  down 
on  a  camp  cot  and  said,  "Although  I  am  dead  tired, 
there  is  absolutely  no  use  in  my  going  to  bed  before 
I  know  something  more,  and  I  am  going  to  serve 


THE  LIFE  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

notice  that  I  intend  to  sit  here  all  night  unless  I  am 
somewhat  enlightened.  I  can  tell  you  this  thing  has 
gone  much  farther  than  skin-deep  with  me  tonight. 
You  fellows  sit  around  and  say  nothing  and  appear 
as  wise  as  owls."  We  told  him  he  knew  as  much  as 
we,  for  we  had  never  before  witnessed  anything  like 
what  had  taken  place. 

Someone  suggested  that  it  had  been  staged  for 
our  special  benefit.  The  leader  fairly  jumped  at  him. 
"Staged !  Why  man,  the  crowd  that  could  stage  any- 
thing like  that  would  be  worth  a  million  a  week  of 
anyone's  money.  And  the  Governor — if  he  was  act- 
ing, you  can  choke  me,  for  that  old  fellow  was  thor- 
oughly frightened.  I  am  going  to  admit  that  I,  for 
a  few  moments,  was  just  about  as  frightened  as^he 
was.  Away  back  somewhere  there  is  a  dim  suggestion 
that  that  old  fellow  had  a  red-hot  reception  staged 
for  all  of  us.  That  outburst  was  not  just  for  Bagget 
Irand.  When  those  soldiers  came  rushing  forward, 
there  was  too  much  of  a  triumphant  note  in  their 
voices.  If  I  am  not  mistaken  they  were  all  in  on  a 
deeper  play  than  we  were  aware  of.  That  same  some- 
thing suggests  that  for  a  moment  they  thought 
Buddha  had  come  to  help  them.  When  they  saw  the 
whole  scheme  had  gone  against  them,  their  very 
bodies  drooped,  and  when  I  think  of  it,  I  remember 
that  they  dropped  their  swords.  Say,  did  not  Buddha 
have  power?  Just  see  how  he  threw  those  words  at 
the  old  Governor.  He  seemed  much  more  powerful 
than  Jesus  did ;  but  then  it  was  his  side  that  needed 
bolstering  up,  for  our  side  under  the  circumstances 
had  all  the  best  of  that  event. 

"But  didn't  the  old  Governor  get  a  boost?  I'll  bet 
by  this  time  he  feels  like  lifting  himself  over  a  fence 
by  his  own  boot  straps.  When  Buddha  clasped  his 

140 


TEACHING  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

hanciss!t  actually  looked  to  me  as  though  the  fellow 
jumped  right  out  of  his  old  self.  We  are  going  to  hear 
a  lot  more  of  him  before  another  sun,  if  I  am  not  mis- 
taken, and  I  am  going,  to  predict  that  it  is  good,  for 
that  old  one  is  a  power  in  this  land.  If  he  got  the 
wonderful  uplift  that  I  did  out  of  it  I  would  not 
mind  being  in  his  boots  after  all." 

We  talked  of  the  things  we  had  seen  arid  heard, 
and  before  we  realized  how  the  time  was  passing, 
dawn  began  to  break.  The  leader  arose,  stretched 
Ms  arms  above  his  head,  and  said,-  "Who  needs  any 
sleep?  I  don't  believe  I  do,  after  listening  to  you 
talk.5*  We  lay  down,  fully  dressed,  for  an  hour's  rest 
before  breakfast. 


141 


CHAPTER  XIV 

WHEN  we  were  summoned  to  breakfast  that 
morning,  the  leader  was  the  first  one  up.  He 
hurried  through  his  morning  toilet  like  an 
eager  schoolboy.  After  he  had  finished,  he  urged 
everybody  to  more  haste.  We  finally  went  in  to 
breakfast  and  found  Emil  and  Jast.  The  leader  went 
over  and  sat  between  them  and  asked  questions 
throughout  the  meal  The  moment  we  finished  eat- 
ing he  arose  from  the  table  and  wanted  to  rush  off 
again  to  see  the  house  that  had  grown  in  fifteen 
minutes,  as  he  expressed  it.  He  put  his  hands  on 
Jast's  shoulders  and  said  that  if  he  had  two  like  Emil 
and  his  mother  what  fun  he  would  have  going 
around  and  growing  houses  for  poor  people.  Then 
he  said,  "But  would  I  not  make  the  landlords  in  New 
York  look  sick?  I  pay  rent  to  those  fellows/'  Then 
Brail  said,  "Suppose  they  would  not  let  you  grow 
houses  for  them?"  "Well/5  he  said,  "I  would  do  it 
anyway,  and  after  I  had  grown  them  and  they  would 
not  use  them,  I  would  pick  them  up  bodily  and  put 
them  in  and  chain  them."  All  of  us  laughed  heartily 
over  these  things. 

We  had  always  taken  the  leader  for  a  quiet,  re- 
served man.  He  told  us  afterwards  that  the  things 
he  had  seen  set  him  on  his  feet,  so  that  he  could 
not  help  asking  questions.  He  also  said  this  had  been 
by  far  the  most  interesting  expedition  of  his  whole 
life,  although  he  was  familiar  with  the  world's  most 
remote  places.  He  definitely  decided  to  assist  us  to 
organize  a  second  expedition  to  carry  on  the  excava- 
tion work  under  the  guidance  of  our  friends.  But 
this  was  prevented  by  his  sudden  passing. 

142 


TEACHING  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

We  could  scarcely  restrain  him  from  going  di- 
rectly to  the  new  house.  We  finally  compromised 
with  hims  and  Jast  and  one  of  the  others  walked 
with  him  to  where  he  could  see  it  They  returned 
from  this  trip  in  about  thirty  minutes,  and  he  was 
jubilant.  He  had  seen  the  little  house  and  it  was  real 
He  said  that  it  brought  back  ever  so  vividly  a  boy- 
hood vision  that  he  had.  Then  he  told  of  seeing 
himself  going  around  with  fairies,  building  houses  for 
poor  people  and  making  them  happy. 

As  our  party  was  so  large,  it  was  thought  best 
not  to  go  in  a  body  to  see  the  little  house.  It  was 
arranged  that  we  were  to  go  in  groups  of  five  or  six. 
The  personnel  of  the  first  group  was  to  be  Emil,  the 
leader,  one  or  two  of  the  ladies  and  myself.  We 
started  out,  and  Emil's  mother  and  our  hostess  joined 
us.  We  walked  on  until  we  came  in  sight  of  the 
house.  The  little  girl  came  running  out  to  meet  us 
and  threw  herself  in  Emil's  mother's  arms,  saying 
that  her  brother  was  strong  and  fine.  As  we  reached 
the  house,  the  mother  of  the  child  came  out,  dropped 
to  her  knees  in  front  of  Emil's  mother  and  began 
telling  how  she  adored  her.  EmiFs  mother  put  out 
her  hands  and  assisted  her  to  her  feet;  telling  hear 
that  she  must  not  kneel  to  her ;  that  what  she  had 
done  for  her  she  would  do  for  anyone ;  that  she  was 
not  to  praise  her,  but  the  Great  One,  for  the  blessing 
she  had  received.  The  little  boy  opened  the  door  and 
the  mother  motioned  us  to  go  in.  We  followed  the 
ladies  in  with  our  hostess  interpreting  for  us.  There 
was  no  question  that  the  house  was  there,  it  con- 
tained four  rooms  and  was  very  comfortable.  It  was 
surrounded  on  three  sides  by  the  most  miserable 
hovels.  We  were  told  that  the  occupants  of  the  hovels 
were  going  to  move  away,  as  they  thought  the  house 


THE  LIFE  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

was  of  the  evil  one  and  might  destroy  them  if  they 
stayed. 

We  heard  more  from  the  Governor  also.  At  about 
eleven  that  morning  he  sent  the  commander  and  a 
detail  of  soldiers  to  invite  us  to  lunch  with  him  at 
two  that  afternoon.  We  accepted,  and  at  the  ap- 
pointed hour  there  was  a  guard  waiting  to  escort  us 
to  the  Governor's  house.  The  reader  will  understand 
there  were  no  fine  equipages  in  that  country ;  so  we 
used  the  only  mode  of  locomotion  we  had — walking. 

When  we  arrived  at  the  Governor's  house  we 
found  that  a  number  of  Llamas,  including  the  High 
Priest,  from  the  nearby  monastery  had  preceded  us. 
We  learned  that  this  monastery  housed  from  fifteen 
to  eighteen  hundred  Llamas  and  was  of  considerable 
importance.  The  Governor  was  one  of  the  higher 
body  of  priesthood  of  the  monastery. 

We  at  first  expected  a  lively  discussion,  but  soon 
learned .  that  the  luncheon  was  only  for  the  purpose 
of  getting  acquainted  with  the  members  of  our  party. 
Our  friends  were  very  well  acquainted  with  the  High 
Priest,  as  they  had  met  a  great  many  times  and  had 
worked  together.  This,  it  seems,  the  Governor  did 
not  know  until  that  morning,  as  the  High  Priest  had 
been  away  from  the  monastery  for  about  three  years 
and  had  returned  only  the  evening  before  our  arrival. 

During  the  course  of  the  lunch,  we  found  that 
these  Llamas  were  well  educated,  had  a  broad  out- 
look on  life,  had  traveled  a  great  deal,  and  two  of 
them  had  spent  a  year  in  England  and  America. 
They  had  been  told  by  the  Governor  of  what  had 
occurred  the  evening  before,  and  in  all  a  very  close 
friendly  feeding  was  evidenced  before  the  luncheon 
was  concluded.  As  for  the  Governor,  we  found  him 
a  very  congenial  fellow  and  the  only  mention  made 

144 


TEACHING  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

of  the  previous  evening  was  to  the  effect  that  a  great 
enlightenment  had  come  to  him.  He  plainly  said  that 
until  the  last  evening  he  had  harbored  a  great  hatred 
for  all  foreigners.  We  were  obliged  to"  "carry  on  all 
conversation  through  interpreters,  which  is  not  very 
satisfactory  when  one  wishes  to  get  at  the  deep 
thoughts  of  the  other. 

Before  we  left,  we  were  extended  a  cordial  invi- 
tation to  visit  the  monastery  and  spend  the  next  day 
there  as  their  guests.  At  Emil's  suggestion  we  ac- 
cepted and  the  next  day  spent  with  them  was  very 
pleasant  and  instructive.  We  found  the  head  Llama 
a  very  remarkable  man.  The  friendship  that  began 
that  day  between  him  and  our  Chief  afterwards 
ripened  into  a  close  and  life-long  brotherly  under- 
standing ;  and  he  was  of  untold  service  to  us  in  the 
later  research  work  which  has  been  carried  on  in  the 
adjoining  country. 


145 


CHAPTER  X  V 

EMIL  TOLD  us  that  there  would  be  a  meeting 
that  evening  somewhat  like  the  one  we  had 
attended  at  his  home  village  the  year  before, 
and  Invited  us  all  to  attend.  We  accepted  with  keen 
delight. 

Just  before  the  appointed  time  for  the  meeting, 
Emil,  his  mother,  and  I  went  to  the  child's  house 
for  the  mother  and  sister,  as  they  had  asked  to  go 
with  us.  On  the  way  from  the  house  to  the  meeting 
place,  we  passed  a  number  of  dilapidated  rnud  huts. 
The  little  girl  stopped  before  the  door  of  one  of  these, 
saying  that  a  blind  woman  lived  there  and  asked 
Emil  if  she  might  go  in  and  bring  her  to  the  meeting 
if  she  wished  to  come.  This  he  gave  her  permission 
to  do.  The  girl  opened  the  door  and  stepped  into  the 
hut,  while  we  stood  waiting  outside.  In  a  few  mo- 
ments she  reappeared  in  the  doorway  and  said  the 
woman  was  afraid,  and  motioned  for  Emil  to  come 
to  her.  He  went  to  the  door  and  they  conversed  for 
a  few  moments;  then  both  entered  the  place. 

EmiFs  mother  said,  "That  child  will  yet  be  a 
power  for  good  among  these  people,  for  she  has  the 
ability  and  determination  to  carry  out  whatever  she 
undertakes.  We  have  decided  to  let  her  handle  this 
in  her  own  way,  except  that  we  direct  and  assist 
her,  guided  by  what  we  perceive  as  the  thing  best 
suiteH  to  give  her  more  confidence  in  herself.  Let  us 
see  thr  method  she  takes  to  induce  this  woman  to 
be  present  at  the  meeting.  The  fear  that  these  dear 
ones  hold  toward  us  is  beyond  belief.  Many  are 
moving  away  from  the  vicinity  of  the  little  one's 
home,  when  you  would  think  they  would  besiege  us 


TEACHING  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

to  assist  them  in  obtaining  homes  like  it.  This  is  the 
reason  we  are  obliged  to  be  so  careful  of  their  feel- 
ings. While  we  desire  to  lift  them  all  from  their 
surroundings,  as  we  did  those  dear  ones,  they  flee 
from  us  at  the  first  sign  of  our  approach." 

I  asked  how  she  was  able  to  help  the  child  and 
her  parents  as  she  had. 

She  answered,  "That  was  through  the  attitude  of 
the  child,  and  through  her  we  could  help  them  all 
She  is  the  balance  wheel  in  that  household,  and 
through  her  we  will  reach  this  dear  soul  and  many 
more  here/5  indicating  the  huts  that  were  about. 
"It  is  these  that  we  love  to  bring  close  to  our  hearts. 
That  little  home  was  not  brought  forth  in  vain." 

Here  Emil  and  the  girl  appeared,  saying  that  the 
woman  wished  the  girl  to  wait  for  her,  and  they 
would  come  on  in  a  short  time.  We  went  on,  leaving 
the  girl  with  the  blind  woman. 

When  we  arrived  at  the  meeting  place,  nearly 
everyone  had  assembled,  and  we  found  that  the 
High  Priest  of  the  monastery  was  to  be  the  head 
spokesman  of  the  evening.  We  were  told  that  Emil 
had  met  this  Llama  about  eighteen  months  before 
and  a  warm  friendship  had  been  formed  at  that 
time.  This  meeting  had  been  arranged  and  we  were 
there  at  the  Llama's  special  request.  This  had  been 
the  occasion  for  their  visit  to  us  the  last  day  on  the 
desert.  We  were  also  told  that  the  Governor  was 
next  in  authority  under  this  man.  A  number  of  the 
surmises  of  our  leader  were  confirmed,  but  our 
friends  showed  no  fear  whatever. 

Emil  said  that  both  of  these  men  were  going  to 
be  their  close  friends  from  that  time  on,  and  that  it 
was  seldom  they  were  able  to  reach  those  as  high  in 
authority  as  these  two,  but  they  were  content  to  let 

147 


•  THE  LIFE  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

matters  move  on  slowly.  We  were  told  that  the  pre- 
ceding evening  was  the  third  time  that  Jesus  and 
Buddha  had  appeared  visibly  to  help  them,  and  they 
•  seemed  pleased  that  we  had  been  there  to  ^witness 
the  scene.  They  did  not  seem  to  look  upon  it  as  an 
added  triumph,  but  as  an  opportunity  to  enable  them 
to  co-operate  and  work  with  these  people. 

At  this  time  the  girl  entered,  leading  the  blind 
woman.  She  found  a  seat  for  her  charge,  a  little  to 
the  rear  and  at  one  side  of  the  room.  After  the 
woman  was  seated,  the  girl  stood  facing  her,  hold- 
ing both  of  her  hands,  and  in  a  moment  she  stooped 
forward  as  though  she  were  speaking  to  the  woman 
in  a  low  voice.  Then  she  straightened  up,  and  letting 
go  of  the  woman's  hands,  placed  her  little  hands 
over  the  woman's  eyes  and  held  them  there  for  two 
or  three  moments.  This  movement  seemed  to  attract 
the  attention  of  everyone  in  the  room,  from  the  High 
Priest  down.  All  arose  and  stood  looking  at  the  child 
and  the  woman,  while  the  High  Priest  walked  rapid- 
ly over  and  placed  his  hand  upon  the  child's  head. 
As  he  did  this  the  child's  frame  shook  visibly,  but 
she  did  not  change  her  position.  The  three  remained 
thus  for  a  few  moments ;  then  the  child  removed  her 
hands  and  cried  out  joyously,  "Why,  you  are  not 
blind  at  all,  you  can  see."  She  pressed  her  lips  to 
the  woman's  forehead,  then  turned  and  walked  over 
to  our  Chief. 

She  seemed  somewhat  bewildered  and  said,  "I 
spoke  in  your  language.  How  did  I  do  that?"  Then 
she  said,  "Why  does  not  the  woman  see  she  is  not 
blind  any  more?  She  can  see." 

We  looked  again  at  the  woman;  she  had  risen 
and,  clasping  the  robe  of  the  High  Priest  in  both 
her  hands,  she  said  in  the  native  tongue,*"I  can  see 

148 


TEACHING  OF  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

you.53  Then  she  looked  around  the  room  with  a  half- 
dazed  air5  saying,  "I  can  see  you  all.5*  She  let  go  of 
the  Priest's  robe  and  burying  her  face  in  her  hands* 
sank  back  into  the  seat  she  had  been  occuping,  sob- 
bing, "I  can  see,  I  can  see,  but  you  are  all  so  clean 
and  I  am  so  dirty.  Let  me  go  away." 

Then  Emil's  mother  stepped  forward.  Standing 
directly  back  of  where  the  woman  was  sitting,  she 
placed  both  her  hands  on  the  woman's  shoulders. 
The  Priest  raised  his  hands,  but  not  a  word  was 
spoken.  Almost  instantly,  the  womanss  garments 
changed  to  clean  new  ones.  Emil's  mother  removed 
her  hands  from  the  woman's  shoulders.  The  woman 
arose  and  in  a  dazed,  perplexed  way  looked  around. 
The  Priest  asked  what  she  was  looking  for,  and  she 
replied  that  she  was  looking  for  her  old  clothing. 
Then  the  Priest  said>  "Do  not  look  for  your  old 
clothes.  See,  you  are  clad  in  clean  new  garments." 
She  stood  for  another  moment  as  though  wrapped 
in  perplexed  thought ;  then  her  face  lighted  up  with 
a  smile,  she  bowed  very  low  and  resumed  her  seat. 

We  were  told  that  this  woman  had  been  blind 
for  more  than  twenty-five  years,  and  that  the  blind- 
ness had  been  caused  when  the  eyeballs  were  pierced 
by  fine  shot  from  a  gun  in  the  hands  of  one  of  a  band 
of  robbers. 

The  excitement  had  been  so  great,  that  our  party 
had  crowded  around.  The  leader,  meanwhile,  had 
worked  his  way  to  the  little  girl,  and  they  were 
conversing  in  low  tones.  He  told  us  afterwards,  that 
the  child  spoke  English  very  well.  Our  hostess  had 
interpreted  when  the  conversation  was  carried  on  in 
the  native  tongue. 

Someone  suggested  that  we  should  be  seated  at 
the  table.  As  we  began  taking  our  places,  the  woman 

149 


THE  LIFE  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

arose  and  told  EmiTs  mother,  who  had  stood  quietly 
at  her  side5  that  she  would  like  to  go.  The  child 
stepped  forward*  saying  she  would  go  with  her  and 
see  that  she  arrived  home  safely.  Here  the  High 
Priest  asked  the  woman  where  she  lived,  and,  upon 
being  told,  said  she  must  not  go  back  to  that  filthy 
place.  The  girl  said  she  was  expecting  to  have  the 
woman  stay  at  her  house,  and  arm  in  arm  they  left 
the  room. 

When  we  were  all  seated,  the  dishes  were  placed 
on  the  table  as  though  by  unseen  hands.  At  this,  we 
saw  the  Priest  start  and  look  around  in  wonderment. 
But  when  the  edibles  began  to  arrive  in  the  same 
way,  he  turned  to  Emifs  mother,  who  was  seated  at 
his  right  hand  and  asked  if  this  was  a  regular  occur- 
ence  with  them,  saying  that  he  had  never  been 
privileged  to  witness  this  before.  He  turned  to  Emil, 
who  was  interpreting  for  us3  as  though  he  would  like 
some  explanation.  Then  Emil  explained  they  were 
able  to  use  the  same  power  that  was  used  to  heal  the 
blind  woman,  to  bring  forth  all  that  they  needed.  It 
was  quite  plain  that  he  was  still  puzzled,  but  he  said 
no  more  until  the  meal  was  well  under  way. 

He  arose  and,  with  Jast  acting  as  interpreter, 
said,  "I  believe  I  can  see  more  deeply  than  I  imag- 
ined human  beings  could  be  privileged  to  see.  Al- 
though my  whole  life  has  been  spent  in  the  Order  of 
the  Priesthood,  in  which  as  I  supposed,  I  was  serv- 
ing my  fellow-men,  I  observe  now  that  I  was  but 
serving  self  far  more  than  I  was  serving  my  brother. 
How  this  brotherhood  has  been  extended  tonight — 
and  my  vision  has  followed  that  extension!  I  am 
just  now  allowed  to  see  what  a  narrow  life  we  are 
living;  that  we  have  lived  despising  everyone  but 
our  own  people.  This  vision  allows  me  to  see  that 

150 


TEACHING  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

you  are  of  the  sublime  as  well  as  we,  and  what  a 
celestial  joy  that  vision  allows  me  to  behold/1 

Here  he  paused  with  his  hands  half  upraised, 
while  a  look  of  surprise  and  pleasure  flooded  his 
countenance.  He  stood  in  this  position  for  a  moment, 
then  he  said,  uThis  is  nonsense.  I  can  and  will  speak 
in  the  language  you  speak.  Why  can  I  not  do  this? 
I  see  what  your  thoughts  were  when  you  told  me 
that  there  was  no  limit  to  man's  ability  to  express. 
I  find  that  I  can  speak  directly  to  you  so  that  you 
may  understand.91 

He  paused  for  a  moment  as  though  to  pick  up 
the  thread  of  thought,  then  spoke  without  the  aid 
of  an  interpreter.  We  were  told  afterwards,  that  this 
was  the  first  time  he  had  spoken  in  English.  He 
continued,  "How  beautiful  it  is  to  be  able  to  speak 
directly  to  you  in  your  own  language.  With  the 
broader  vision  this  has  given  me,  I  am  consumed 
with  wonder  as  to  why  men  look  upon  any  of  their 
brothers  as  enemies.  It  comes  so  clearly  that  we  all 
must  be  of  the  same  family,  the  same  source,  the 
same  cause.  Would  that  not  determine  that  there 
was  room  for  all?  If  one  brother  chooses  to  see  dif- 
ferently than  we  do,  why  should  we  say  that  he 
must  perish?  I  see  we  can  not  interfere;  for  if  we 
interfere,  we  but  retard  our  own  development  and 
isolate  ourselves.  If  we  do  this  our  house  will  fall 
and  crumble  about  our  own  heads.  Now  I  see,  in- 
stead of  a  limited  race,  a  universal,  eternal,  limitless 
.  All — All  coming  from  the  One  and  returning  to  the 
One. 

"I  see  that  your  Jesus  and  our  Buddha  lived  by 
the  same  light.  Their  lives,  as  well  as  all  others  who 
live  in  and  by  that  same  light,  must  merge  into  the 
One.  I  am  beginning  to  see  where  it  all  converges. 

151 


THE  LIFE  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

The  crystal  clear  light  is  shedding  its  radiance  over 
me.  I  believe  that  man  elevates  himself  to  a  regal 
position,  but  often  when  he  has  gained  that  position 
he  can  no  more  see  his  brother  as  regal  He  wishes 
to  be  regal  himself,  and  his  brother  to  be  the  serf. 

"Why  did  that  child  place  her  hands  on  the  eyes 
of  that  dear  one  whose  eyes  were  closed?  I  see  now 
that  it  was  because  that  child  saw  more  deeply  than 
I,  who  should  have  had  more  knowledge.  It  is  what 
you  call  a  mighty  love.  It  is  the  same  which  caused 
Jesus  and  Buddha  to  stand  together;  at  which  I 
did  wonder,  but  I  wonder  no  longer.  Now  I  see  that 
it  does  no  harm  to  include  you  all ;  for  as  we  include 
you,  we  have  the  good  that  you  have,  and  that  can 
but  benefit  us.  I  can  see  that  the  power  which  will 
always  protect  you  will  protect  me.  The  armor  that 
protects  me  will  in  the  same  way  protect  you.  If  it 
protects  you  and  me,  it  must  protect  all.  The  divid- 
ing line  has  disappeared.  What  a  celestial  truth! 
I  see  your  thought  when  you  say  the  world  is  God's 
world,  and  the  near  and  far  places  are  His.  If  we 
see  the  near  and  far  places  together,  they  will  be  the 
same  to  us.  We  live  in  a  place  surrounded  by  our 
own  world,  not  seeing  the  fact  that  outside  our  little 
world  the  whole  wide  world  surrounds  us ;  and  that 
world  will  help  us  if  we  will  let  it.  Then  to  think  that 
God  surrounds  one  and  all ! 

"I  now  see  the  Holy  Brother's  thought  when  he 
said  the  doors  are  to  be  thrown  wide  to  those  who 
are  ready  to  receive.  It  is  said  that  man  shall  not 
only  give  ear,  but  he  shall  become  that  which  he 
claims  to  be,  and  sinking  self  he  shall  be  immersed 
in  the  Brotherhood  of  Man.  It  is  deeds,  not  fine 
words,  that  endure.  I  can  see  that  the  way  of  prog- 
ress is  not  only  barred  by  the  creeds  of  others,  but 

152 


TfcAGHING  OF  THE   MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

by  those  of  ourselves.  Each  is  directly  claiming  the 
graces  of  the  Most  High ;  each  attempting  to  build 
up  his  own  by  dismantling  and  tearing  down  all 
others.  Instead  of  using  energy  to  tear  down,  that 
energy  should  go  to  consolidate  the  whole.  The  Most 
High  not  only  made  one  nation  of  one  life,  but  of 
one  life  all  the  nations  of  the  earth.  The  time  is  now 
come  when  we  must  choose  between  creeds  and  the 
Brotherhood  of  Man.  Creeds  are  but  the  conjurings 
of  man.  The  faith  that  moves  mountains  still  slum- 
bers in  the  seed  of  the  plan.  The  height  and  gran- 
deur is  still  there  for  man  to  attain.  The  law  of  en- 
lightenment has  preceded  that  of  miracle.  This  law 
of  enlightenment  is  the  higher  law  of  Love,  and  Love 
is  the  Universal  Brotherhood. 

"I  now  see  that  all  that  is  needed  is  for  each  to 
return  to  the  fountain  of  his  own  religion,  to  remove 
all  false  interpretations  and  cast  out  all  selfishness. 
In  each  will  be  found  the  pure  gold  of  the  alchemist, 
the  Wisdom  of  the  Most  High ;  your  God  and  my 
God,  not  many  gods  of  many  people,  just  one  God. 
It  is  the  same  God  who  spoke  to  Moses  from  out  the 
burning  bush ;  the  same  God  of  whom  Jesus  spoke 
when  he  said  that  through  prayer  he  could  summon 
legions  to  sustain  him  in  his  hour  of  mortal  struggle 
in  doing  the  work  the  Father  had  given  him  to  do  ; 
the  same  God  to  whom  Peter  prayed  when  he  was 
released  from  prison.  I  now  see  the  mighty  power 
that  can  be  summoned  to  the  aid  of  those  who  will 
co-operate  in  the  Brotherhood  of  a  consecrated  life.*' 

Here  he  raised  a  glass,  held  it  for  a  moment  in 
the  palm  of  his  hand.  He  became  very  still,  and  the 
glass  crumbled  to  dust.  Then  he  continued,  "The 
armies  before  Jericho  knew  of  this  power  when  they 
blew  their  trumpets  and  the  walls  of  the  city  fell 

153 


THE  LIFE  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

Paul  and  Silas  knew  of  it  when  they  released  them- 
selves from  prison/' 

Again  he  stood  for  a  moment  in  perfect  silence, 
The  building  rocked  and  swayed,  great  tongues  of 
lightning  flashed,  and  two  great  masses  of  rock  be- 
came detached  from  the  mountainside  about  a  mile 
away  and  came  rumbling  down  into  the  valley  be- 
low. The  villagers  came  running  from  their  houses 
in  terror,  and  we  could  scarcely  restrain  ourselves 
from  doing  the  same,  so  violently  did  the  building 
rock  and  sway. 

Then  he  lifted  his  hand,  all  became  quiet,  and 
he  continued :  "Of  what  avail  are  armies  or  navies, 
when  man  knows  that  God  has  this  power  and  that 
His  true  sons  may  use  it?  You  can  sweep  an  army 
away  as  a  child  blows  the  down  from  a  thistle.  As 
for  great  battleships,  they  may  be  dissolved  like  this 
glass."  Here  he  lifted  the  plate  upon  which  he  had 
deposited  the  powder  that  now  represented  the  glass. 
He  breathed  upon  it  lightly;  it  burst  into  flames  and 
disappeared  entirely. 

He  again  resumed,  "These  legions  come  not  to 
do  your  work,  or  my  work,  or  to  use  man  as  their 
instrument ;  man  may  call  upon  them  to  encourage, 
sustain,  and  comfort  him,  in  his  work  as  master  of 
every  condition  of  life.  With  this  power  man  may 
still  the  waves,  control  the  winds,  quench  the  fire, 
or  direct  the  multitude.  One  may  use  them  only 
as  he  has  mastered  them.  He  may  use  them  for  the 
good  of  the  whole  human  race,  or  he  may  use  them 
to  drive  home  the  meaning  of  man  co-operating  with 
God.  One  who  is  able  in  his  divinity  to  call  upon 
these  legions,  knows  beyond  question  that  he  can  use 
this  combined  power  only  in  true  service  to  human- 
ity, for  he  knows  that  it  will  consume  him  as  <vell  as 


TEACHING  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

defend  him." 

Here  the  speaker  paused  for  a  moment,  stretched 
forth  his  hands,  and  in  a  measured,  reverent  voice, 
said,  "Father,  it  is  our  great  pleasure  to  have  these, 
our  dear  friends,  with  us  tonight.  It  is  with  a  true 
and  humble  heart  that  we  say  Thy  will'' be  done/ 
We  bless  them,  and  in  blessing  them  we :  bless  the 
whole  world."  __  ;' 

He  sat  down  as  calmly  :as  though  nothing' out  of 
the  ordinary  had  taken  place,  and  all  our  friends 
were  calm ;  but  the  members  of  our  party  were  on 
tiptoe  with  excitement.  Then  the  invisible '  choir 
broke  forth  with  "All  know  the  power  that's  in  a 
name,  and  man  may  proclaim  himself  the  King  and 
then  with  humble  mien,  that  man  may  rule  himself 
supreme." 

During  this  remarkable  demonstration  of  power 
we  had  been  unconscious  of  our  tense,  nervous  con- 
dition, but  as  the  choir  finished,  we  became  conscious 
of  this,  and  we  had  seemed  to  need  the  music  to  help 
us  relax.  When  the  last  strains  of  music  had  died 
away,  we  arose  from  the  table  and  gathered  around 
our  friends  and  the  Priest. 

This  gave  the  leader  and  our  Chief  opportunity 
to  ask  questions ;  and  the  Priest,  seeing  their  interest 
invited  them  to  spend  the  night  at  the  monaster] 
with  him.  They  bade  us  goodnight  and  left  the  room 
together. 

We  were  scheduled  to  leave  at  noon  next  day. 
It  was  arranged  that  only  Jast  and  Chander  Sen 
should  accompany  us  to  our  outfitting  point,  where 
Emil  would  join  us  and  the  three  would  return  with 
us  to  the  village  of  our  winter  quarters.  After  these 
arrangements  were  completed,  we  returned  to  camp 
but  did  not  retire  until  nearly  daybreak,  so  interested 
were  we  in  talking  of  what  we  had  witnessed. 


CHAPTER  XVI 

AT  TWELVE  o'clock,  with  all  final  arrange- 
ments complete,  the  expedition  moved  out  of 
the  village,  amid  the  cheers  and  good  wishes 
of  the  greater  number  of  the  villagers,  who  had 
gathered  to  bid  us  goodby. 

Our  next  stopping  place,  where  we  were  obliged 
to  cross  a  wide  stream,  was  reached  about  six  that 
evening.  It  was  thought  best  to  camp  in  order  to 
prepare  for  the  crossing,  as  this  would  consume  the 
greater  part  of  the  next  day.  Since  there  was  no 
bridge  or  boat,  the  crossing  was  accomplished  by 
sliding  across  on  a  large  cable  made  of  plaited 
leather  thongs  that  had  been  stretched  across  the 
river.  The  individual  members  of  the  party  experi- 
enced no  difficulty  in  negotiating  the  cable.  The 
chief  difficulty  was  in  getting  the  horses  and  mules 
across.  This  was  finally  accomplished  by  making  a 
strong  sling  from  leather  straps  and  arranging  it  so 
that  an  attachment  would  fit  over  and  slide  along 
the  leather  cable.  This  sling  was  first  securely  fas- 
tened around  the  animal's  body,  then  secured  over 
the  cable,  and  the  animal  was  pushed  over  the  bluff, 
where  it  hung  suspended  above  the  roaring  torrent 
until  it  was  pulled  to  the  other  bank.  To  this  sling 
were  attached  two  ropes  of  sufficient  length  to  reach 
across  the  river,  one  serving  to  pull  the  animal 
across,  while  the  other  served  to  pull  the  sling  back 
again  for  another  animal.  In  this  way  all  crossed 
safely. 

We  experienced  no  further  difficulty,  and  aside 
from  the  crossing,  we  found  the  trail  much  better 
than  the  one  we  had  followed  going  out.  We  arrived 

156 


TEACHING  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

safely  at  our  outfitting  point,  where  the  expedition 
was  disbanded;  and  arrangements  were  completed 
for  those  who  were  to  return  home  to  go  on  to  the 
seaport  by  the  regular  caravan  route. 

The  next  morning  Emil  joined  us,  and  after  bid- 
ding our  associates  goodby  we  started  out  on  our 
return  trip  to  the  village  of  our  former  winter  quar- 
ters* We  again  stopped  two  days  to  rest  at  the  bandit 
camp,  where  the  two  men  remained,  thus  reducing 
our  party  to  seven.  These  two  men  told  their  com- 
rades of  the  remarkable  trip  they  had  made  and 
the  wonders  they  had  seen.  Our  party  was  shown 
every  courtesy,  though  of  course  our  three  friends 
came  in  for  the  greater  honors.  The  leader  of  the 
band  assured  them  that  the  bandits  would  hold  the 
location  of  the  cities  absolutely  sacred  out  of  their 
respect  for  the  consideration  that  had  been  shown 
them.  We  were  told  there  was  very  little  danger  of 
this  band's  ever  attempting  to  go  so  far  away ;  the 
desert  bandits  never  invaded  the  mountains  nor  did 
the  mountain  bandits  invade  the  desert,  for  they 
were  continuously  at  war  with  each  other.  So  far 
as  we  know  they  have  faithfully  kept  their  promise. 

The  morning  we  left  this  camp,  the  leader  of  the 
band  came  and  gave  our  Chief  a  small  silver  coin 
about  the  size  and  weight  of  an  English  shilling, 
with  a  curiously  wrought  inscription  upon  it,  saying 
that  if  any  of  the  bandit  bands  in  that  country  mo- 
lested us,  we  would  gain  our  instant  release  by  show- 
ing this.  He  told  us  that  it  had  been  in  the  possession 
of  his  family  for  many  generations,  and  that  he 
cherished  it  very  highly,  but  he  wished  our  Chief  to 
have  it  as  a  token  of  his  esteem.  After  examining 
it  carefully,  Emil  said  it  was  a  very  faithful  repro- 
duction of  a  coin  that  had  been  in  use  in  the  North- 


*57 


THE  LIFE  .OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

em  Gobi  many  thousands  of  years  ago.  The  date 
showed  that  this  -  particular  coin  had  been  made 
more  than  -seven  hundred  years  before.  He  then  told 
us  that  these  coins  were,  worn  as  a  kind  of  charm  by 
some,  of -the.  natives  of  the  region;  and  the  older  the 
coins  were,  the  more  efficacious  they  were  supposed 
to  be.  No  doubt  this  particular  one  had  been  prized 
very  highly  by  the  leader  and  the  whole  band. 

From  this  village  we  -continued  our  journey  and 
arrived  at  bur  winter  quarters  in  due  time  without 
further  incident.  We  were  welcomed  heartily  by 
the  party  which  visited  us  in  the  desert  and  which 
we  had  left  at  the  village  where  we  met  the  High 
Priest. 

We  were  again  invited  to  share  the  home  of  our 
former  hostess,  which  invitation  we  gladly  accepted. 
This  time  there  were  but  four  of  us,  as  seven  of  our 
associates  had  returned  to  India  and  Mongolia  to 
carry  on  further  research  work.  This  arrangement 
had  been  suggested  and  agreed  to  in  order  to  give  us 
more  time  for  the  translation  of  the  records.  All  was 
quiet  in  the  little  village  and  we  gave  every  moment 
of  our  time  to  the  arrangement  and  form  of  the  sym- 
bols and  characters  which  made  up  the  alphabet, 
placing  them  in  the  order  that  enabled  us  to  use 
them,  thus  giving  us  an  insight  into  the  meaning  of 
the  words.  In  this  we  were  assisted  by  Chander  Sen. 
While  he  was  not  with  us  all  the  time,  he  or  our 
hostess  was  always  at  hand  to  help  us  over  the  diffi- 
cult places.  This  continued  until  the  last  days  of 
December,  when  we  noticed  that  a  number  of  people 
were  again  congregating  for  the  yearly  gathering. 
They  were  nearly  all  people  we  had  met  at  the 
gathering  the  year  before.  We  found  that  this  year 
they  were  to  meet  in  the  temple  and  use  the  center 

158 


TEACHING  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

room  of  the  five  upper  rooms  that  were  arranged 
along  the  ledge  as  already  •  described. 

We  went  up  to  this  room,  early  New  Year's  Eve, 
in  order  to  meet  and  talk  with  those  who  had  gath- 
ered. We  found  that  they  were  from  numerous 
places  and  they  told  us  of  things  that  had  happened 
in  the  outside  world,  with  which  we  were  beginning 
to  feel  we  had  lost  all  contact.  Yet  we  had  been 
happy  in  our  work,  the  time  had  passed  rapidly  and 
we  were  very  content. 

While  we  were  talking,  one  of  the  guests  came 
in  and  said  that  the  moon  was  very  beautiful.  A 
number  of  those  in  the  room,  including  all  of  our 
party,  walked  out  upon  the  ledge.  It  was  indeed  a 
beautiful  sight  from  that  elevation.  The  moon  had 
just  risen,  and  seemed  to  be  floating  through  a  great 
bank  of  delicate  colors  which  were  reflected  on  the 
vast  expanse  of  snow  that  covered  mountain  and 
valley-  and  the  colors  were  continuously  changing. 
Someone  said,  "Oh,  the  carillon  will  ring  tonight." 
In  a  few  moments  the  bells  did  begin.  At  first  it  was 
as  though  a  bell  located  a  long  way  off  had  been 
struck  three  times;  then  smaller  and  smaller  ones 
sounded,  coming  nearer  until  they  seemed  but  tiny 
bells  located  directly  at  our  feet.  So  real  was  the 
impression  that  we  looked  down  expecting  to  see  the 
bells.  This  melody  continued  until  it  seemed  as 
though  thousands  of  bells  were  being  struck  in  per- 
fect harmony.  The  bank  of  color  would  rise  until  it 
appeared  to  be  even  with  the  ledge  where  we  were 
standing,  and  it  would  seem  as  though  we  could  step 
out  upon  it,  so  completely  did  it  shut  out  the  earth 
below.  As  the  color  raised  in  undulating  swells,  the 
sound  of  the  bells  would  increase  until  the  melody 
filled  every  niche. 

*59 


THE  LIFE  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

It  appeared  as  though  we  were  standing  on  the 
stage  of  a  great  amphitheatre  with  thousands  of 
dim  forms  and  faces  of  those  listening  to  the  bells. 
Then  a  full,  strong  tenor  voice  began  to  sing 
''America/*  and  in  an  instant  thousands  of  voices 
took  up  the  words  while  the  bells  carried  the  melody. 
Thus  the  song  went  booming  on  until  the  end,  when 
voices  back  of  us  said,  "America,  we  greet  you." 
Then  others  said,  "We  greet  the  whole  world/9 

We  turned,  and  there  stood  Jesus,  the  High  Priest 
and  Emil.  We  had  become  so  enraptured  by  the 
phenomenon  that  was  taking  place  about  us  that  we 
had  become  wholly  unconscious  that  there  were 
others  near  us.  All  stepped  aside  to  let  the  three 
enter  the  room.  As  Jesus  turned,  we  could  see  that 
remarkable  light  that  always  shone  out  when  he  was 
present,  and  as  he  stepped  through  the  door  the 
whole  room  became  a  blaze  of  white  light.  All  went 
in  and  were  seated  at  the  tables. 

Jesus  was  seated  at  the  first  table  and  the  Priest 
at  our  table,  with  Emil  and  our  Chief  on  either  side. 
This  time  there  were  but  two  long  tables  down  the 
length  of  the  room.  There  were  no  coverings;  but 
as  we  were  seated,  the  tables  were  covered  with 
white  linen  and  the  service  came  on  almost  as  quick- 
ly. The  food  seemed  to  come  with  the  plates,  with 
the  exception  of  the  bread.  A  loaf  appeared  on  the 
table  before  Jesus.  He  picked  it  up  and  began  break- 
ing it.  placing  the  pieces  on  a  plate.  When  the  plate 
was  filled,  a  dim  childish  form  lifted  it  and  stood 
silent  until  seven  plates  had  been  filled  and  seven 
forms  stood  holding  them.  As  Jesus  broke  the  bread 
and  filled  the  plates,  the  load  did  not  diminish, 

As  the  last  plate  was  filled,  Jesus  arose  and  with 
outstretched  hands  said,  "This  bread  which  I  pre- 

1 60 


TEACHING  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

sent  to  you,  represents  God's  pure  Life.  Partake  of 
that  pure  Life  which  is  always  of  God."  Then  as  the 
bread  v  as  handed  around,  he  went  on  to  say,  "When 
1  said  "I  am  lifted  up'  and  that  by  being  so  lifted  up 
I  would  draw  all  men  to  me,  I  knew  that  in  the  light 
of  that  experience  some  day  all  would  see  eye  to  eye 
and  know  full  well  when  they  could  be  lifted  up  as 
I  am  lifted.  I  saw  heaven  right  here  on  earth  among 
men.  This  is  the  Truth  that  I  perceived,  and  the 
Truth  will  make  all  free.  Then  they  will  find  that 
there  is  but  one  fold  and  one  shepherd ;  and  if  one 
strays,  it  is  safe  to  leave  all  the  ninety  and  nine,  to 
seek  the  one  that  he  may  return.  God  may  be  all  in 
all  to  all  His  children;  and  all  are  His — they  are 
far  nearer  and  dearer  to  Him  than  the  sparrows  or 
the  lilies  of  the  field.  If  He  rejoices  in  the  lilies' 
growth  and  notes  the  sparrow's  fall,  how  much  more 
does  He  note  the  growth  of  His  dear  children. 
Neither  does  He  judge  them  more  than  He  does  the 
lilies  or  the  sparrow,  but  holds  them  dear  to  His 
great  cause  and  not  one  can  be  left  out  when  His 
perfection  is  established. 

"I  could  see  that  if  this  ideal  could  be  graven  in 
letters  of  purest  gold  on  the  walls  of  the  temples  of 
the  world's  great  thought,  it  would  lift  men's 
thoughts  above  the  murk  and  mire  by  setting  their 
feet  on  a  rock,  a  sure  foundation ;  where  the  winds 
and  tides  could  lash  and  roar,  but  while  men  stood 
steadfast  and  true,  they  would  be  secure.  Because  of 
this  security,  peace,  and  calm,  they  would  aim  to  the 
heights  where  they  see  their  true  dominion.  They 
may  soar  above,  but  they  will  not  find  heaven  above. 
Thev  will  find  it  right  among  men,  and  it  is  not 
reached  by  merely  plodding  on  and  on,  in  toil  and 
.sorrow  and  great  tribulation,  and  then  eventually 


THE  LIFE  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

finding  the  great  Jewel.  It  is  much  more  quickly 
reached  by  throwing  off  all  materiality  and  the  laws 
that  thereby  bind  men  to  the  eternal  wheel  Then 
step  forth,  pick  up  the  Jewel,  incorporate  it,  let  the 
light  shine  forth,  and  you  have  gained  by  one  direct 
step  that  which  you  may  put  off  through  all  eternity* 
if  you,  will.  You  will  find  that  the  soul  which  insists 
upon  immediate  and  complete  spiritual  illumination 
and  emancipation,  here  and  now;  and  knows  that 
his  relation  to  God  is  the  relation  of  parent  and 
child ;  quickly  sees  that  this  not  only  makes  clear  the 
divine  possibilities,  but  that  he  has  them  to  use  and 
they  will  work  for  him  as  he  wills.  To  that  one,  the 
New  Testament  story  will  not  be  fiction  nor  a  vague 
dream  that  may  happen  after  death,  but  an  ideal 
that  is  lifted  up  before  the  world,  of  a  perfect  reali- 
zation of  a  life  of  love  and  service.  That  ideal  is  the 
divine  accomplishment  of  all,  here  and  now. 

"Then  will  they  know  the  vision  I  saw  when  I 
said,  'Many  shall  seek  to  enter  in  and  shall  not,  for 
strait  is  the  gate  and  narrow  Is  the  way  that  leads 
to  eternal  life.'  For  without  the  true  appreciation  of 
the  Christ  Ideal,  and  of  the  divine  and  perfect  plan 
of  the  co-operation  of  man  and  God  right  here  on 
this  earth,  the  realization  of  this  ideal  is  impossible 
and  it  becomes  only  a  dream,  a  myth — nothing. 

"The  door  giving  access  to  this  omnipotent  and 
transforming  alchemy  of  the  Spirit  in  man  is  open 
to  all  at  all  times,  and  the  key  to  its  opening  is  in 
the  thoughts  of  all.  When  two  ideals  and  methods 
of  salvation,  or  of  securing  the  saving  grace  of  God's 
love,  are  different,  it  is  man's  thoughts  and  not  God 
that  made  them  so.  Those  who  close  the  door  to 
the  immediate  blessings  of  God  for  all  His  children, 
isolate  themselves  from  the  immediate  blessings  that 

16* 


TEACHING  OF  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

God  bestows  upon  the  Christ  Child,  and  from  the 
spiritual  illumination  of  the  transcendent  alchemy 
of  Spirit  and  the  all-potent  power  which  are  theirs 
to  use  as  the  Christ  would  and  should  use  them. 
When  men  recognize  this,  the  leper  will  be  made 
whole  instantly,  the  withered  arm  will  be  restored, 
and  all  diseases  of  body  and  mind  will  vanish  at  their 
touch.  Through  the  concentration  of  the  spoken 
word,  they  will  multiply  the  loaves  and  fishes ;  and- 
as  they  break  the  bread  or  pour  the  oil  for  the  mul- 
titude, it  will  never  diminish  but  there  will  always 
be  an  abundance  left.  They  will  calm  the  raging  sea 
or  tempest  by  their  command,  and  gravitation  will 
be  overruled  by  levi&tion,  for  their  command  is  the 
command  of  God.  Then  will  they  know  my  thoughts 
when  I  gave  forth  my  opening  message  to  the  world 
as  1  left  the  temple  that  day,  when  I  said,  'the  time 
is  fulfilled  and  the  Kingdom  of  God  is  at  hand/  and, 
'have  faith  in  God  and  nothing  is  impossible  to  you/ 
AH  who  believe  they  can  do  the  work  that  I  do,  and 
will  come  forth  and  do  them,  may  do  even  greater 
works  than  I  have  done.  They  will  know  that  it  is  a 
process  of  living  the  life,  believing  and  knowing; 
then  absolutely  nothing  is  impossible  to  them. 

"They  will  know  that  the  Holy  Spirit,  the  whole 
of  the  Divine  Spirit  in  them,  says  today  just  as  it 
did  long  ago,  that  if  they  hear  its  voice  and  harden 
not  their  hearts,  they  will  find  they  are  the  light  of 
the  world,  and  they  that  follow  that  light  shall  not 
walk  in  darkness.  They  will  know  that  they  are  the 
door  by  which  all  enter  into  the  light  of  life,  and 
those  who  will  go  in  and  out  by  that  door  will  find 
eternal  peace  and  great  joy  and  will  discover  that 
now  is  the  accepted  time. 

"They  will  find  that  the  Christ  but  opens  the 

163 


THE  LIFE  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  BAST 

door  to  their  own  souls,  and  the  spirit  that  dwells 
therein  is  the  all-potent  alchemy  as  limitless  as  the 
universe  of  God  is  limitless.  The  alchemy  will  dis- 
solve and  transmute  all  manner  of  sickness;  will 
erase  clean  the  mortal  life  of  guilt  and  the  effects  of 
sin ;  will  illuminate  the  soul  with  the  perfect  light  of 
Wisdom;  will  emancipate  from  and  dissolve  the 
darkened  conditions  of  human  life  into  the  perfect 
light  of  life.  Thus  they  will  see  they  are  not  only 
children  of  nature  but  children  of  God  as  well.  They 
will  bring  forth  the  absolute  perfection  of  the  indi- 
vidual and  thus  will  perfect  the  race.  They  will 
bring  forth  the  ideal  and  the  divinely  inspired  proph- 
ecy concerning  the  final  destiny  of  man  here  on 
earth,  the  identity  of  Father  and  Son,  which  is  the 
second  birth,  the  perfect  mastery  of  man  over  every 
condition  and  circumstance.15 

Here  Jesus  paused  and  the  lights  became  brighter 
and  brighter.  Then  pictures  began  to  appear.  The 
scenes  were  glorious  bursts  of  splendor.  The  pictures 
would  come  on,  a  transforming  hand  would  reach 
out  and  touch  them,  and  they  would  develop  into 
a  great  whole  and  become  beautiful. 

There  came  on  a  great  war  scene.  We  saw  men 
struggling  and  fighting  against  each  other.  The  can- 
nons were  belching  forth  flames  and  smoke.  Shells 
burst  overhead  and  among  the  great  throng;  and 
men  were  falling  on  every  hand.  We  could  hear  the 
roar  and  din  of  battle.  Indeed,  it  was  so  real  that  it 
seemed  certain  a  battle  was  in  progres^  but  as  the 
transforming  hand  reached  out  and  over  it,  all 
became  calm  in  an  instant.  As  those  who  had  been 
fighting  so  furiously  but  a  moment  before,  looked  up, 
the  hand  traced  in  flaming  letters  that  seemed  to 
spread  over  the  whole  scene:  "Peace,  Peace,  the 


TEACHING  OF  THE   MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

Blessed  Peace  of  God  surrounds  you.  You  can  only 
hurt  and  destroy  the  mortal.  But  one  of  God's  own 
you  can  not  destroy  and  you  are  all  His  own  chil- 
dren. You  can  neither  hurt  nor  destroy  each  other." 

Then  for  a  moment  it  seemed  that  men  were 
again  determined  that  the  struggle  should  proceed ; 
this  determination  showed  on  many  faces,  especially 
those  of  the  leaders.  But  it  appeared  that  the  more 
determined  they  became  to  go  on,  the  less  cause  there 
seemed  to  be  for  a  display  of  force.  It  also  seemed 
that  the  more  they  attempted  to  discharge  the  wea- 
pons of  destruction,  the  less  effect  they  had ;  for  try 
as  they  would,  not  a  weapon  could  be  used. 

Then  the  hand  went  on  to  trace,  "Behind  every 
cloud  of  storm  or  war,  if  men  will  only  look,  they 
will  find  God.  They  will  find  that  God  did  not  create 
the  clouds  of  storm  or  war,  that  man  created  them ; 
and  if  they  will  look  beyond  and  see,  they  will  al- 
ways find  God's  hand  upraised  in  peace.  War  is  not 
sent  or  ordained  by  God ;  when  men  war  with  each 
other  they  are  entirely  outside  of  God's  province  or 
power.  They  are  entirely  immersed  in  a  man-made 
realm  where  God  cannot  interfere  in  any  way,  and 
they  will  be  obliged  to  go  on  in  this  way  until  they 
see  the  fallacy  of  such  strife.  If  one  is  sufficiently 
strong  in  his  realization  of  God-power,  knows  his 
ability  to  co-operate  with  that  power,  and  does  co- 
operate, he  can  stop  a  war  instantly,  just  as  you  saw 
it  stopped  in  this  picture.** 

Then  Jesus  continued,  "I  chose  the  way  of  the 
cross.  It  was  not  my  Father's  choice  for  me  but  my 
choice,  that  all  might  see  they  can  so  perfect  the  life 
and  body  that  although  it  be  destroyed  it  can  be 
rebuilt  and  become  more  triumphant/* 

The  lights  grew  even  brighter,  until  every  vestige 

165 


THE  LIFE  OF  THE  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

of  limitation  had  disappeared;  not  a  wall  sur- 
rounded us,  not  a  roof  overhead,  not  a  floor  beneath. 
We  all  stood  together  in  boundless  space.  The  twelve 
disciples  came  and  arranged  themselves  near  the 
Great  Master,  but  did  not  surround  him,  for  his 
presence  stood  out  far  more  prominently  than  any 
other,  with  a  never-to-be-forgotten  brilliance  and 
purity.  The  invisible  choir  boomed  out,  "His  King- 
dom is  here,  for,  of,  and  among  men.  Now  hence- 
forth and  forever,  one  man,  one  God."  The  trans- 
forming hand  again  appeared  and  traced  the  words, 
"His  Kingdom  is  here  now,  among  men,  henceforth, 
forever,  one  man,  one  God."  Then  directly  over 
Jesus5  head  were  traced  the  words,  "ALL  FOR 
ONE,  ONE  FOR  ALL." 

Buddha  then  appeared,  standing  at  Jesus5  right. 
The  Priest  and  Emil  walked  to  them  and  knelt  be- 
fore them,  Emil  at  Buddha's  right  and  the  Priest 
at  Jesus*  left.  Jesus  clasped  Buddha's  partly  upraised 
hand.  They  raised  their  free  hands  until  these  were 
over  and  just  above  the  heads  of  the  two  who  were 
kneeling,  and  said,  "Peace !  Peace !  Peace !  A  glori- 
ous peace  rests  over  all.  We  receive  you,  our  dear 
brothers,  into  the  great  council  of  God's  beneficent 
Love;  and  that  Love  and  Fellowship  includes  the 
whole  world."  Then  all  those  assembled  bowed  their 
heads  and  made  way  as  the  four  passed  through 
the  assembly.  As  they  passed,  the  disciples  and  a 
number  of  those  assembled  followed,  and  all  passed 
on  until  they  disappeared  from  our  vision. 

When  they  had  begun  moving  through  the  as- 
sembly, the  invisible  choir  had  chanted,  "We  make 
way  for  these  mighty  brothers  of  Love;  for  that 
Love,  the  mighty  Love  of  God,  redeems  and  unites 
all  mankind  in  the  great  council  of  God's  Love,  the 

166 


OF  MASTERS  OF  THE  FAR  EAST 

Brotherhood  of  Man  and  God.n  As  they  passed  from 
view,  the  great  bell  boomed  out  twelve  strokes.  Then 
for  a  moment*  the  beMs  pealed  a  merry 'refrain  and 
thousands  of  voices  Joined  In:  "We  bring  the  glad 
New  Year  and  a  brighter  day  for  all  the  world." 

Our  second  year  with  these  -great  souls  had 
closed. 


PUBLISHER'S  NOTE:  In  addition  to  Volumes  One, 

Two  and  Three9  we  have  published  Volumes  Four 
and  Five  in  which  is  continued  the  accounts  of  Mr. 
Spalding*s  experiences. 


167 


1 36  478